Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design at any time without
notice.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed precisely.
SIC0697
If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not
do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
CAUTION
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-
SORY
If you see a symbol similar to those above in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front
of the vehicle.
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed care-
fully.
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above indicate movement or action.
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® is
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A.
Gracenote® is a registered tra-
demark of Gracenote, Inc. The
Gracenote logo and logo type,
and the “Powered by Gracenote”
logo are trademarks of Grace-
note.
XM Radio® requires a subscrip-
tion, sold separately after the first
90 days. It is not available in
Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For
more information, visit
www.xmradio.com.
C
* 2009 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-
copying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE
PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES ...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you
would like to provide NISSAN directly with
comments or questions, please contact the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using
our toll-free number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for
the following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
—
—
Your name, address, and telephone number
Vehicle identification number (attached to
the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
—
Date of purchase
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
—
Current odometer reading
Your NISSAN dealer’s name
Your comments or questions
—
—
OR
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
1
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
8
9
Index
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
Meters and gauges............................................. 0-9
System (SRS) ................................................... 0-2
Engine compartment ......................................... 0-10
VQ35DE engine .......................................... 0-10
Warning and indicator lights ............................... 0-11
Exterior front ..................................................... 0-3
Exterior rear ...................................................... 0-5
Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
1. Rear center seat belt (Page 1-22)
2. Adjustable headrest (P.1-12)
3. Seat belts (P.1-15)
4. Armrest (P.1-14)
5. Head restraints (P.1-9)
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-11)
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags (P.1-45)
7. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-45)
8. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap
child restraint) (P.1-29)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
system (P.1-28)
10. Rear seats (P.1-6)
— Child restraints (P.1-26)
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags (P.1-45)
12. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-57)
13. Front seats (P.1-3)
14. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-51)
SSI0372B
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Hood (P.3-18)
2. Headlight and turn signal lights
— Switch operation (P.2-32)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)
3. Windshield wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-28)
— Rain-sensing auto wiper system*
(P.2-29)
— Blade replacement (P.8-17)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)
4. Roof rack (rail)* (P.2-47)
5. Moonroof* (P.2-51)
6. Power windows (P.2-48)
7. Recovery hook (P.6-15)
8. License plate installation (P.9-11)
9. Fog lights*
— Switch operation (P.2-35)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
10. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-30, P.9-7)
— Flat tire (6-2)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-12, P.5-3)
11. Outside mirrors (P.3-29)
12. Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-4)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)
— Security system (P.2-25)
13. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-7)
SSI0373
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-23)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
*: if so equipped
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR REAR
1. Lift gate (P.3-19)
— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-15)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)
2. Rear window wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-30)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)
3. Rear window defroster (P.2-31)
4. High-mounted stop light
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
5. Antenna (P.4-62)
— Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-32)
6. Back-up light
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
7. Rear combination light
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
*: if so equipped
SSI0374
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
8. Front map lights (P.2-53)
9. Mood light (P.2-54)
10. Sunglasses holder (P.2-42)
11. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-27)
— Anti-glare adjustment* (P.3-28)
— HomeLink® universal transceiver* (P.2-55)
— Compass* (P.2-7)
12. Cargo area
— Storages (P.2-45)
— Luggage hooks (P.2-46)
— Cargo light (P.2-55)
— Spare tire (P.6-3)
13. Rear cup holders (P.2-41)
14. Heated seat switch (rear)* (P.2-37)
15. Console box - rear (P.2-43)
16. Auxiliary input jack* (P.4-48)
17. Console box (P.2-43)
— Power outlet* (P.2-39)
18. Front cup holders (P.2-41)
19. Storage box (P.2-44) or Cigarette lighter/Ashtray
(P.2-40)
*: if so equipped
SSI0636
1. Cargo cover* (P.2-45)
2. Rear personal light (P.2-53)
3. Coat hooks (P.2-48)
— Headphones (P.4-66)
5. Door armrest
— Power window switch (P.2-48)
— Power door lock switch (P.3-6)
— Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-29)
4. Mobile Entertainment System (MES)*
— Flip-down screen (P.4-64)
6. Sun visors (P.3-26)
— Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player (P.4-63)
— DVD remote controller (P.4-67)
7. Moonroof* (P.2-51)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Steering wheel
— Horn (P.2-36)
— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-45)
— Power steering system (P.5-25)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches (P.5-18)
9. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-28)
10. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9)
11. Center ventilator (P.4-25)
12. Center display (P.4-2)/Center color display*
(P.4-2)/Navigation system**
13. Heater/air conditioner or
Center multi-function control panel*
— Navigation system**
— Vehicle information and setting buttons (P.4-8)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P.4-75)
— Audio system (P.4-31)
14. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-36)
15. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-45)
16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(P.2-39, 5-27)
17. Hood release handle (P.3-18)
18. Power lift gate main switch (P.3-19)
19. Power seatback switch* (P.1-6)
20. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)
SSI0627
5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*
21. Parking brake (P.5-17)
1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)
— Audio control* (P.4-61)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control*
(P.4-75)
22. Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch
(P.3-25)
2. Power lift gate switch* (P.3-19)
3. Headlight, fog light* and turn signal switch
(P.2-32)
23. Intelligent Key port (P.5-11)
6. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)
4. Fuel-filler door opener switch (P.3-23)
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24. Audio system (P.4-31)
— Clock (P.2-38)
25. Heated seat switch* (P.2-37)
26. Selector lever (P.5-13)
27. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-52)
28. Power outlet (P.2-39)
29. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch* (P.5-21)
30. Rear window and outside mirror* defroster switch
(P.2-31)
31. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-26) or Audio
system (P.4-31)
32. Glove box (P.2-43)
*: if so equipped
**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped).
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
1. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-35)
2. Tachometer (P.2-6)
3. Speedometer (P.2-5)
4. Fuel gauge (P.2-7)
5. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-10)
6. Trip computer switch (P.2-21)
7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display (P.2-17)
8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)
9. Vehicle information display
— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-5)
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator (P.2-15)
10. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-5)
SSI0377
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
SDI2172
6. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-20)
7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-7)
9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-7)
VQ35DE ENGINE
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-11)
2. Drive belt location (P.8-15)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
5. Air cleaner (P.8-16)
10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8)
11. Battery (P.8-13)
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Indicator
light
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-14
Name
Page
2-10
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
indicator light (AWD models)*
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning
light (AWD models)*
Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) position indicator 2-15
light
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
2-11
2-11
Cruise indicator light
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-16
Front passenger air bag status
light
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
High beam indicator light
2-12
2-12
2-12
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Overdrive off indicator light
Slip indicator light
Intelligent Key warning light
Low tire pressure warning light 2-12
Small light indicator lights
Master warning light
2-14
2-14
2-14
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
Seat belt warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
off indicator light
Supplemental air bag warning
light
*: if so equipped
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
MEMO
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system
Seats .............................................................. 1-2
Front seats ................................................... 1-3
Rear seats.................................................... 1-6
Head restraints.............................................. 1-9
Seat belts ...................................................... 1-15
Precautions on seat belt usage ....................... 1-15
Child safety ................................................ 1-17
Pregnant women.......................................... 1-18
Injured persons............................................ 1-18
Three-point type seat belt .............................. 1-18
Seat belt extenders....................................... 1-25
Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-25
Child restraints ................................................ 1-26
Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-26
Top tether strap child restraint......................... 1-29
Child restraint installation using LATCH ............. 1-31
Child restraint installation using the seat belts..... 1-35
Booster seats.................................................. 1-41
Precautions on booster seats.......................... 1-41
Booster seat installation................................. 1-43
Supplemental restraint system............................. 1-45
Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-45
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ................................................ 1-51
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag systems ......... 1-55
Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ......... 1-57
Supplemental air bag warning labels................. 1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light................... 1-58
Repair and replacement procedure................... 1-59
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
(LATCH) .................................................... 1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS
.
The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when
the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seat-
back is reclined, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and being injured
is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or da-
mages.
SSS0133
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON
SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this
section.
WARNING
.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
.
.
After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely
locked.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0793
SSS0792
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback
can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission in
the P (Park) position.
Seat lifter (if so equipped):
FRONT SEATS
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position
is achieved.
Front manual seat adjustment
Forward and backward:
1
Pull the lever
up and hold it while you slide
*
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in
position.
Reclining:
2
To recline the seatback, pull the lever
up and
*
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever up and lean your body forward. Release
the lever to lock the seatback in position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front power seat adjustment
Operating tips:
.
The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
.
Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
See “AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER” in the
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section
for the seat position memory function.
SSS0684
Lumbar support (if so equipped):
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver.
1
Move the lever
up or down to adjust the
*
seatback lumbar area.
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS1027
SSS1026
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in
the P (Park) position.
Seat lifter (if so equipped):
Forward and backward:
1
*
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
down to adjust the angle of the front portion or
height of the seat.
Moving the switch
forward or backward will
slide the seat forward or backward to the
desired position.
Reclining:
2
Move the recline switch
backward until the
*
desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
2
*
forward again, move the switch
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback
can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold down the seatbacks:
A
Pull the strap on the rear seat
. Pull the lever
*
B
beside the cargo area and fold the seat-
*
back.
SSS1028
SSS0569
REAR SEATS
Lumbar support (if so equipped):
Folding
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver.
Before folding the rear seats:
1
2
Push the front
or back
end of the switch
*
*
.
Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks
on the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks” later
in this section.)
to adjust the seatback lumbar area.
.
Disconnect and stow the center seat belt
and tongue into the retractor base. (See
“Rear center seat belt” later in this section.)
.
.
Always reconnect the center seat belt when
the seat is returned to the upright position.
Remove drink containers from the rear cup
holder.
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the control unit detects any obstacle or
malfunctions while in the power operation, a
beep sounds for 4 seconds and the seatback
will return to the folded position automatically.
Check if there are any obstacles caught that
prevent seats from returning to the folded
position. See a NISSAN dealer if the beep still
sounds.
.
.
Do not fold down the rear seats
when occupants are in the rear seat
area or any luggage is on the rear
seats.
When folding or returning the seat-
backs to the upright position, to
avoid injury to yourself and others:
— Make sure that the seat path is
clear before moving the seat.
CAUTION
— Be careful not to allow hands or
feet to get caught or pinched in
the seat.
When operating the rear power seat-
back return, make sure that the vehicle
is stopped and the transmission is in
the P (Park) position.
.
Properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shifting.
Do not place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
SSS0821
To return the seatbacks:
WARNING
Manual operation:
Lift up each seatback and push it to the upright
position until it is latched.
.
.
Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seats
when they are in the fold-down
position. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
.
.
.
When returning the seatbacks, be
sure to attach the rear center seat
belt connector.
Power operation (if so equipped):
Push and hold the corresponding switch located
B
on the lower side of the instrument panel
or
Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
*
A
the right or left side in the cargo area
.
*
Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
A beep sounds once and the seatback will be
returned automatically.
When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
A beep sounds twice when the seatback is fully
returned to the seating position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
WARNING
.
If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured
in the correct position, serious per-
sonal injury may result in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
.
.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat belt
properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON
SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this
section.
SSS0227A
Reclining
Pull the reclining strap
A
*
and position the
seatback at the desired angle. Release the
reclining strap after positioning the seat at the
desired angle.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes to help
obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “PRECAU-
TIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this
section.) The seatback may also be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
parked.
After adjustment, check to be sure
the seat is securely locked.
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other
vehicle safety systems. They may pro-
vide additional protection against injury
in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the
head restraints properly, as specified in
this section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not
attach anything to the head restraint
stalks or remove the head restraint. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint
has been removed. If the head restraint
was removed, reinstall and properly
adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions
can reduce the effectiveness of the
head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
SSS1013
SSS0992
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. The head re-
straints are adjustable.
Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a head restraint.
4. Stalks
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0997
SSS0993
SSS0994
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears.
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0995
SSS0996
SSS0508
Removal
Install
Front-seat Active Head Restraint
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable head restraints.
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint
is facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
The Active Head Restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives
from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The
movement of the head restraint helps support
the occupant’s head by reducing its backward
movement and helping absorb some of the
forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
the adjustment notches
must be in-
*
2
*
stalled in the hole with the lock knob
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-
sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said
that whiplash injury occurs most.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described earlier in this section.
ADJUSTABLE HEADREST
WARNING
The adjustable headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjust the headrests properly, as
specified in this section. Check the
adjustment after someone else uses
the seat. Do not attach anything to the
adjustable headrest stalks or remove
the adjustable headrests. Do not use
the seat if the adjustable headrests
have been removed. If the headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly
adjust the headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to
follow these instructions can reduce the
effectiveness of the adjustable head-
rests. This may increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a collision.
SSS1014
SSS0992
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with adjustable headrests. The head-
rests are adjustable.
Components
1. Adjustable headrest
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with an adjustable headrest.
4. Stalks
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0997
SSS0993
SSS0994
To raise the headrest, pull it up.
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the headrest down.
Adjustment
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with
the center of your ears.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0995
SSS0996
SSS0229A
Removal
Install
ARMREST
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable headrests.
1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in
the seat. Make sure that the headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
Rear armrest
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
the adjustment notches
must be in-
*
2
stalled in the hole with the lock knob
.
*
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
3. Remove the headrest from the seat.
headrest down.
4. Store the headrest properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
3. Properly adjust the headrest before an
occupant uses the seating position.
5. Install and properly adjust the headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your
chances of being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and
all of your passengers to buckle up every time
you drive, even if your seating position includes a
supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SSS0136
SSS0134
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Be sure the seat belt tongue is
securely fastened to the proper
buckle.
WARNING
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat and,
if appropriate, in a child restraint.
Do not wear the seat belt inside out
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
.
.
.
Do not allow more than one person
to use the same seat belt.
The seat belt should be properly
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do
so may reduce the effectiveness of
the entire restraint system and in-
crease the chance or severity of
injury in an accident. Serious injury
or death can occur if the seat belt is
not worn properly.
Never carry more people in the
vehicle than there are seat belts.
If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and
all seat belts fastened, it may in-
dicate a malfunction in the system.
Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
SSS0016
.
.
Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your
chest. Never put the belt behind
your back, under your arm or across
your neck. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
.
No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do
not modify the seat belt, add mate-
rial, or install devices that may
change the seat belt routing or
tension. Doing so may affect the
operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the
seat belt system may result in
serious personal injury.
Position the lap belt as low and
snug as possible AROUND THE
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt
worn too high could increase the
risk of internal injuries in an acci-
dent.
SSS0014
.
Once a seat belt pretensioner has
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD SAFETY
activated, it cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly
fitting seat belt could cause serious or
fatal injury. Always use appropriate
child restraints.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
.
.
Removal and installation of the
pretensioner system components
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
All seat belt assemblies, including
retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN
recommends that all seat belt as-
semblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was
minor and the belts show no da-
mage and continue to operate prop-
erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is
noted.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. (See
“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
Also, there are other types of child restraints
available for larger children for additional pro-
tection.
.
.
.
Rear-facing child restraint
Front-facing child restraint
Booster seat
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear-
facing child restraints. Front-facing child re-
straints are available for children who outgrow
rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1
year old. Booster seats are used to help position
a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a front-facing child restraint.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. (See “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM” later in this section.)
.
All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the
restraint manufacturer’s inspection
instructions and replacement re-
commendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
Infants
WARNING
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
Infants and children need special pro-
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of
the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The
booster seat should raise the child so that the
shoulder belt is properly positioned across the
top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap
belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only
be used in seating positions that have a three-
point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. Once the child has grown so the
shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with
your doctor for specific recommendations.
Small children
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a front-facing
child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation and use.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident or sudden stop.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat
belts which are provided. The seat belt may not
fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and
80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,
and always position the lap belt as low as
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place
the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across
your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over
.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat belt
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the
shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
properly.
SSS0292
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this
section.)
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
.
.
The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
allow the driver and passengers some freedom
of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for
child restraint installation.
When ALR mode is activated the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in
this section.
SSS0290
SSS0326
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is
activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension.
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the
buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
belt movement by two separate methods:
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
WARNING
.
When the belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
When fastening the seat belts, be
certain that seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
.
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
.
.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to
.
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
restrict further belt movement.
WARNING
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any question about seat belt
operation, see a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
After adjustment, release the ad-
justment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down
to make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
SSS0351A
Shoulder belt height adjustment
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. (See
“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE”
earlier in this section.)
1
To adjust, pull the adjustment button
, and
*
then move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2
desired position
, so that the belt passes
*
over the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling
off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0845
SSS0846
SSS0241
Seat belt hooks
Rear center seat belt
The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue
WARNING
When the rear seat belts are not in use and
when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
1
2
*
and a seat belt tongue
. Both the
*
.
.
Always fasten the connector tongue
and the seat belt in the order shown.
connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-
tion.
Always make sure both the connec-
tor tongue and the seat belt tongue
are secured when using the seat
belt or installing a child restraint. Do
not use the seat belt or child
restraint with only the seat belt
tongue attached. This could result
in serious personal injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop.
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stowing rear center seat belt:
When folding down the rear seat, the rear center
seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position
as follows:
1
1. Hold the connector tongue
so that the
*
seat belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
buckle. Release the connector tongue by
A
inserting a suitable tool such as key
the connector buckle.
into
*
2. Insert the seat belt tongue into the retractor
2
*
base first
.
SSS0703
3. Then secure the connector tongue into the
3
retractor base
.
*
The center seat belt buckle and the tongue are
identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat
belt tongue can be fastened only into the center
seat belt buckle.
WARNING
.
.
Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
.
If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured
SSS0225
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching rear center seat belt:
in the correct position, serious per-
sonal injury may result in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
Always be sure the rear center seat belt
connector tongue and connector buckle are
attached. Disconnect only when folding down
the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull out the connector tongue from the
1
*
retractor base
.
2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the
2
*
retractor base
.
3. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector
3
*
buckle until it clicks
.
The center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle are indicated by the ! and ~ mark.
The center seat belt connector tongue can be
attached only into the rear center seat belt
connector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat
belts” earlier in this section.
WARNING
.
.
Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
SSS0232
When attaching the rear center seat
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
WARNING
.
.
.
Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
.
If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured
in the correct position, serious per-
sonal injury may result in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal
injury in the event of an accident.
SSS0235
Never use seat belt extenders to
install child restraints. If the child
restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured in a
collision or a sudden stop.
Storing rear seat belt buckles
Before folding down the seat, put the buckles in
the storage of the seat cushion to avoid
dropping it under the seat cushion.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
.
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender is available that is
compatible with the installed seat belts. The
extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of
length and may be used for either the driver or
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.
.
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
.
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt
assembly should be replaced.
WARNING
.
.
Infants and small children should
always be placed in an appropriate
child restraint while riding in the
vehicle. Failure to use a child re-
straint can result in serious injury or
death.
Infants and small children should
never be carried on your lap. It is not
possible for even the strongest
adult to resist the forces of a severe
accident. The child could be crushed
between the adult and parts of the
vehicle. Also, do not put the same
seat belt around both your child and
yourself.
SSS0099
.
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. A
rear-facing child restraint must only
be used in the rear seat.
NISSAN recommends that the child
restraint be installed in the rear
SSS0100
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
seat. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat. If you must install a
front-facing child restraint in the
front seat, see “CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS” later in this section.
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the child
restraint.
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be
positioned to fit the child restraint,
but as upright as possible.
After attaching the child restraint,
test it before you place the child in
it. Push it from side to side while
holding the seat near the LATCH
attachment or by the seat belt path.
The child restraint should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side
to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the
restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the belt as
necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You
may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
or LATCH. Some child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to these lower anchors. For
details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren System (LATCH)” later in this section.
.
.
Improper use or improper installa-
tion of a child restraint can increase
the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants of the
vehicle and can lead to serious
injury or death in an accident.
Follow all of the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for in-
stallation and use. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure to select
one which will fit your child and
vehicle. It may not be possible to
properly install some types of child
restraints in your vehicle.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
(See “CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.)
In general, child restraints are also designed to
be installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder
seat belt.
.
.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden
stop greatly increases.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and small children of various sizes. When
selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
.
When your child restraint is not in
use, keep it secured with the LATCH
System or a seat belt to prevent it
from being thrown around in case of
a sudden stop or accident.
Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand only those
.
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating
positions only. Do not attempt to install a child
restraint in the center position using the LATCH
anchors.
.
.
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on front-facing child
restraints to be secured to the designated
anchor point on the vehicle.
SSS0419B
LATCH system anchor location
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compa-
tible child restraints. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to use
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
SSS0637
LATCH system lower anchor
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LATCH lower anchor point locations
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of
the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH anchors.
WARNING
.
Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration. If a child
restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured
or killed in an accident.
SSS0643
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
SSS0644
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
.
.
Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH anchors. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly.
LATCH child restraints generally require the use
of a top tether strap. (See “TOP TETHER
STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section
for installation instructions.)
Installing child restraint LATCH anchor
attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this
system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint. Check your
child restraint for a label stating that it is
compatible with LATCH system. This information
may also be in the instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer.
Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint. (See
“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH” later in this section.)
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-
STRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint
requires the use of a top tether strap, it must
be secured to an anchor point.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tacts the top tether strap may
damage the top tether strap
during a collision.
WARNING
.
.
Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint top tether strap is da-
maged.
SSS0822
— If the cargo cover contacts the
top tether strap when it is at-
tached to the top tether anchor,
remove the cargo cover from the
vehicle or secure it on the cargo
floor below its attachment loca-
tion. If the cargo cover is not
removed, it may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the seatbacks.
Installing top tether strap
First secure the child restraint with the LATCH
system (rear outboard seating positions only) or
the seat belt as applicable.
1. Remove the headrest from the seatback.
Store it in a secure place.
— Do not allow cargo to contact
the top tether strap when it is
attached to the top tether an-
chor. Properly secure the cargo
so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or that con-
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
bracket that provides the straightest instal-
lation.
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
ing your fingers into the lower
anchor area and feeling to make
sure there are no obstructions over
the LATCH anchors, such as seat
belt webbing or seat cushion mate-
rial. The child restraint will not be
secured properly if the LATCH an-
chors are obstructed.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint on the rear
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-
tails.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint using LATCH system:
WARNING
1. Adjust the rear seatback to the upright
position.
.
Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown. For the LATCH lower anchor
locations, see “Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren System
(LATCH)” earlier in this section. If a
child restraint is not secured prop-
erly, your child could be seriously
injured or killed in an accident.
SSS0645
Front-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
.
.
The LATCH anchors are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstance are they to
be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.
Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0646
Front-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3
SSS0647
SSS0638
Front-facing — step 5
Front-facing — step 7
4. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback. If
necessary, adjust or remove the headrest
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. (See
“HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this sec-
tion.)
5. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
If the headrest is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
headrest when the child restraint is re-
moved.
6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.)
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable headrest and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4
through 7.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
SSS0648
Rear-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 2
SSS0649
Rear-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 4.
SSS0639
SSS0650
Rear-facing — step 3
Rear-facing — step 4
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, if you must install a front-
facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat, move the passen-
ger seat to the rearmost position.
Also, be sure the front passenger air
bag status light is illuminated to
indicate the passenger air bag is
OFF. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section
for details.
.
A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
The instructions in this section apply to child
restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts
in the rear seat or the front passenger seat.
.
.
The three-point seat belt in your
vehicle is equipped with an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which
must be used when installing a child
restraint.
SSS0100
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
Failure to use the ALR mode will
result in the child restraint not being
properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or otherwise be un-
secured and cause injury to the child
in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Front air bags in-
flate with great force. A rear-facing
child restraint could be struck by the
front air bag in a crash and could
seriously injure or kill your child.
.
When using the rear center seat belt
to install a child restraint, make sure
the connector tongue and the seat
belt tongue are secured. Do not use
the seat belt with only the seat belt
tongue attached. This could result in
serious personal injury in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
.
NISSAN recommends that child re-
straints be installed in the rear seat.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the seatback. If necessary,
adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest
(front passenger seat only) to obtain the
correct child restraint fit. (See “HEAD
RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section.)
If the head restraint/headrest is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed.
SSS0640
Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1
SSS0360B
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
Front-facing — step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear
seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. Adjust the rear seatback to the upright
position.
If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0651
SSS0652
SSS0653
Front-facing — step 4
Front-facing — step 5
Front-facing — step 6
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). (See “TOP
TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” ear-
lier in this section.) Do not install child
restraints that require the use of a top tether
strap to seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt
webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is
in the ALR mode.
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 9.
SSS0641
SSS0823
Front-facing — step 8
Front-facing — step 11
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
seat belt path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
11. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0100
SSS0654
SSS0655
Rear-facing — step 2
Rear-facing — step 3
Rear-facing
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear
seat:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0656
SSS0657
SSS0658
Rear-facing — step 4
Rear-facing — step 5
Rear-facing — step 6
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the child
restraint; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint with
your hand to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up on
the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
seat belt path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEATS
7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat
belt webbing out of the retractor, the
retractor is in the ALR mode.
between the adult and parts of the
vehicle. Also, do not put the same
seat belt around both your child and
yourself.
.
NISSAN recommends that the boos-
ter seat be installed in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat. If you must install a
booster seat in the front seat, see
“BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION”
later in this section.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
SSS0099
.
.
.
A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that has
a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
three-point type seat belt with a
booster seat can result in a serious
injury in sudden stop or collision.
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
.
.
Infants and small children should
always be placed in an appropriate
child restraint while riding in the
vehicle. Failure to use a child re-
straint or booster seat can result in
serious injury or death.
Improper use or improper installa-
tion of a booster seat can increase
the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants of the
vehicle and can lead to serious
injury or death in an accident.
Infants and small children should
never be carried on your lap. It is not
possible for even the strongest
adult to resist the forces of a severe
accident. The child could be crushed
Do not use towels, books, pillows or
other items in place of a booster
seat. Items such as these may move
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
during normal driving or a collision
and result in serious injury or death.
Booster seats are designed to be
used with a lap/shoulder belt. Boos-
ter seats are designed to properly
route the lap and shoulder portions
of the seat belt over the strongest
portions of a child’s body to provide
the maximum protection during a
collision.
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the abdomen.
.
.
Do not put the shoulder belt behind
the child or under the child’s arm. If
you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT
INSTALLATION” later in this section.
When your booster seat is not in
use, keep it secured with a seat belt
to prevent it from being thrown
around in case of a sudden stop or
accident.
.
.
Follow all of the booster seat man-
ufacturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use. When purchasing a
booster seat, be sure to select one
which will fit your child and vehicle.
It may not be possible to properly
install some types of booster seats
in your vehicle.
LRS0455
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the booster
seat.
.
Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
If the booster seat and seat belt is
not used properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision or a
sudden stop greatly increases.
.
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be
positioned to fit the booster seat,
but as upright as possible.
After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt,
make sure the shoulder portion of
1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that booster
seats be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a booster
seat in the front passenger seat, move
the passenger’s seat to the rearmost
position.
CAUTION
LRS0453
LRS0464
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
when using a booster seat with the
seat belts.
.
Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1
.
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with
your child. Always follow all recommended
procedures.
low back booster seat
is chosen, the
*
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
high back booster seat
should be used.
*
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0640
LRS0451
LRS0452
Front passenger seat
Rear center position
Rear outboard position
1. Adjust the rear seatback to the upright
position.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS”
earlier in this section.)
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the seat belt
routing.
If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
If the head restraint/headrest is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the boos-
ter seat is removed.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information concern-
ing the following systems:
.
Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
.
.
.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bag
LRS0454
SSS0823
Front passenger seat
Seat belt pretensioner
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT
BELT” earlier in this section.
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal collisions.
status light
may or may not be
illuminated depending on the size of the
child and the type of booster seat used.
(See “Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.)
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side impact
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side impact or
rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain
and rollover air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a
rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for a
short period of time.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection
provided by the driver and passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away from
the steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this
section for instructions and precautions on seat
belt usage.)
SSS0131
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.
SSS0132
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
back against the seatback and as
far-away as practical from the steer-
ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-
ways use the seat belts.
crease the risk that they are injured
if the front air bag inflates.
WARNING
.
The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower se-
verity frontal collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
.
The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with
sensors that detect if the seat belts
are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag
System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage then
inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
.
.
The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag
status light is lit or if the front
passenger seat is unoccupied. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
.
The front passenger seat is
equipped with an occupant classifi-
cation sensor (pattern sensor) that
turns the front passenger air bag
OFF under some conditions. This
sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The
front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, if you are
unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways or out of position in
any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may
also receive serious or fatal injuries
from the front air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit
.
Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could in-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0007
SSS0008
SSS0099
SSS0006
SSS0009
SSS0100
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
.
Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side
air bags or curtain and rollover air
bags inflate if they are not properly
restrained. Pre-teens and children
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat, if possible.
SSS0059A
Do not lean against doors or windows.
SSS0140
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in
this section for details.
SSS0188A
SSS0162
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain and rollover air bags are
most effective when you are sitting
well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor. The side
air bag and curtain and rollover air
bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand,
leg or face near the side air bag on
the side of the seatback of the front
seat or near the side roof rails. Do
not allow anyone sitting in the front
seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window
or lean against the door. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the previous
illustrations.
side air bag inflation.
SSS0159
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover supple-
mental air bags:
.
When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly re-
strained. Some examples of danger-
ous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
.
The side air bags and curtain and
rollover air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a frontal
impact, rear impact or lower severity
side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk
or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
.
Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-
TEM (front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed
to meet certification requirements under U.S.
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.
However, all of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual still apply and
must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel; the
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher severity
frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain
frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper front air bag
operation.
SSS0847
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has
dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors
information from the crash zone sensor, satellite
sensor, Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt
buckle sensors and occupant classification
sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the
occupant classification sensor is also monitored.
1. Crash zone sensor
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag inflators
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bag modules
8. Seat belt pretensioners
9. Satellite sensors
4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
5. Occupant classification system control unit
10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Based on information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally,
the front passenger air bag may be automatically
turned OFF under some conditions, depending
on the information provided by the occupant
classification sensor. If the front passenger air
bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light
will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the
light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will
be off). (See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section for further
details.) One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
an inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver
and passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, the air bag module during
inflation.
SSS0823
Front passenger air bag status light
The front air bags will deflate quickly after a
collision.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If
you are considering modification of your vehicle
due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in
the front of this Owner’s Manual.
Front passenger air bag and status light
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection.
Failure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats,
seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the head
and chest of the front occupants. They can help
1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be
automatically turned OFF.
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the
occupant classification sensor is designed to
operate as described above to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF for specified child
restraints. Failing to properly secure child
restrains and to use the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)
may allow the restraint to tip or move in an
accident or sudden stop. This can also result in
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead
of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS”
earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.)
Status light:
The front passenger air bag status light
is located on the instrument panel below the air
conditioner controls. The light operates as
follows:
The occupant classification sensor (pattern
sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion
and is designed to detect an occupant and
objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag
System is designed to turn the passenger air
bag OFF in accordance with the regulations.
Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in
the regulations is on the seat, the occupant
classification sensor can detect it and cause the
air bag to turn OFF.
.
Unoccupied passenger seat: The
light is OFF and the front passenger air bag
is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
.
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
indicate that the front passenger air bag is
OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
light illuminates to
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as
outlined in this manual should not cause the
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat
properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could cause the
sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure
to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly
for the most effective protection by the seat belt
and supplemental air bag.
.
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
section: The
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
light is OFF to indicate
Front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described
below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags
in your vehicle are not part of this system.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is
automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-
pied. The light will not illuminate when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate
child restraints and booster seats be properly
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
passenger air bag status light is illuminated
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting
on the seat properly.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.
This can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensor. This can
also affect the operation of the air
bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
light
, located in the meter and gauges area,
will blink. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may
not be illuminated, depending on the size of the
child and the type of child restraint being used. If
the air bag status light is not illuminated
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat
belt is used properly and the occupant is
positioned properly. If the air bag status light is
not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
.
.
Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you
may severely burn yourself.
WARNING
.
.
Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the instru-
ment panel. Also, do not place any
objects between any occupant and
the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the supplemental air bag system.
This is to prevent accidental infla-
tion of the supplemental air bag or
damage to the supplemental air bag
system.
If the passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end
structure. This could affect proper
operation of the front air bag sys-
tem.
Do not place objects with sharp
edges on the seat. Also, do not
place heavy objects on the seat that
will leave permanent impressions in
the seat. Such objects can damage
the seat or occupant classification
sensor (pattern sensor). This can
affect the operation of the air bag
system and result in serious perso-
nal injury.
Tampering with the supplemental
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and
the instrument panel assembly by
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. However, if the
seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status
light will remain off.
.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners
1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
placing material over the steering
wheel pad and above the instrument
panel or by installing additional trim
material around the air bag system.
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
be modified or disconnected. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be
used on the air bag system.
.
Modifying or tampering with the
front passenger seat may result in
serious personal injury. For exam-
ple, do not change the front seats by
placing material on the seat cushion
or by installing additional trim ma-
terial, such as seat covers, on the
seat that is not specifically designed
to assure proper air bag operation.
Additionally, do not stow any ob-
jects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback.
Such objects may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant
classification sensor.
.
A cracked windshield should be
replaced immediately by a qualified
repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
SSS0848
*
The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-
PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND
ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-
PACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMEN-
TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the seat belt system. This may
affect the front air bag system.
Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal in-
jury.
The side air bags are located in the outside of
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain and
rollover air bags are located in the side roof rails.
These systems are designed to meet voluntary
guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-
of-position occupants. However, all of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The side air bags and curtain and rollover air
bags are designed to inflate in higher severity
Work on and around the front air
bag system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
side collisions, although they may inflate if the
forces in another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity side impact. They are
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side
collisions. Curtain and rollover air bags are also
designed to inflate in certain types of rollover
collisions or near rollovers.
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the occupants in the outboard seating positions.
Because of this, the force of the side air bags
and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bags and curtain
and rollover air bags will deflate quickly after the
collision is over.
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a side
air bag inflates.
.
.
Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain and rollover air bag
system components will be hot. Do
not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bag operation.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of this side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bags. This is to prevent
damage to or accidental inflation of
the side-impact air bag and curtain
side-impact and rollover air bag
systems.
When the side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
The side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel.
This could affect proper operation
of the side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bag systems.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest
and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain
and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in the front and
rear outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags
may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air
bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
WARNING
Tampering with the supplemental
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing
material near the seatbacks or by
installing additional trim material,
.
Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door
finisher and the front seat. Such
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
(front seats)
such as seat covers, around the side
air bag.
and probing devices should not be
used on the pretensioner system.
.
Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag
.
If you need to dispose of a preten-
sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct preten-
sioner disposal procedures are set
forth in the appropriate NISSAN
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal
procedures could cause personal
injury.
WARNING
systems should be done by
a
.
.
The pretensioners cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-
placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
be modified or disconnected. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be
used on the side air bag and curtain
and rollover air bag systems.
If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner
is not activated, be sure to have the
pretensioner system checked and, if
necessary, replaced by a NISSAN
dealer.
The pretensioner system activates in conjunc-
tion with the front air bag system. The preten-
sioner system also activates with the curtain and
rollover air bags in certain types of rollover
collisions or near rollovers. Working with the
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the pretensioner system. This is
to prevent damage to or accidental
activation of the pretensioners.
Tampering with the pretensioner
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury.
*
The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide
the buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same
way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. The
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
Work around and on the preten-
sioner system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner
system, the supplemental air bag warning light
will not come on, will flash intermittently or
will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after
the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON
position. In this case, the pretensioner may not
function properly. They must be checked and
repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
SSS1016
SPA1097
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle
as shown in the illustration.
The supplemental air bag warning light, display-
ing
in the instrument panel, monitors the
circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt
pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits
include Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone
sensor, satellite sensors, occupant classification
system, front air bag modules, side air bag
modules, curtain and rollover air bag modules,
pretensioners and all related wiring.
SRS air bag
1
The warning labels
are located on the
*
surface of the sun visors.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-
CEDURE
the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.
This means the system is operational.
placed by a NISSAN dealer. The air
bag modules and pretensioner sys-
tem cannot be repaired.
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed
to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a
reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemen-
tal air bag warning light will remain illuminated
after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-
ment of these systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
.
.
The front air bag, side air bag and
curtain and rollover air bag systems,
and pretensioner system should be
inspected by a NISSAN dealer if
there is any damage to the front
end or side portion of the vehicle.
.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
If you need to dispose of a supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
tems, or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemen-
tal air bag and pretensioner system
disposal procedures are set forth in
the appropriate NISSAN Service
Manual. Incorrect disposal proce-
dures could cause personal injury.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
and rollover air bags and pretensioners and
related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The ignition
switch should always be in the LOCK position
when working under the hood or inside the
vehicle.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain and rollover air bag and preten-
sioner systems may not operate properly. It must
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to
the nearest NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
WARNING
.
Once a front air bag, side air bag or
curtain and rollover air bag has
inflated, the air bag module will
not function again and must be
replaced. Additionally, if any of the
front air bags inflate, the activated
pretensioners must also be re-
placed. The air bag module and
pretensioner system should be re-
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-
over air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
tems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel ................................................ 2-2
Meters and gauges............................................. 2-4
Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-5
Tachometer................................................... 2-6
Compass (if so equipped).................................... 2-7
Zone variation change procedure ....................... 2-9
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ....... 2-10
Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-10
Warning lights............................................. 2-10
Indicator lights............................................. 2-14
Audible reminders ........................................ 2-16
Dot matrix liquid crystal display............................ 2-17
Indicators for operation.................................. 2-18
Indicators for maintenance.............................. 2-20
Trip computer.............................................. 2-21
Security systems.............................................. 2-25
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) ............ 2-25
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System................. 2-27
Windshield wiper and washer switch .................... 2-28
Headlight and turn signal switch .......................... 2-32
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) .................... 2-32
Headlight switch .......................................... 2-32
Turn signal switch ........................................ 2-35
Horn ............................................................. 2-36
Heated seats (if so equipped) ............................. 2-37
Clock ............................................................ 2-38
Models without color display........................... 2-38
Models with color display............................... 2-38
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........... 2-39
Power outlet ................................................... 2-39
Cigarette lighter and ashtray (if so equipped).......... 2-40
Storage ......................................................... 2-41
Cup holders................................................ 2-41
Sunglasses holder........................................ 2-42
Glove box .................................................. 2-43
Console box ............................................... 2-43
Storage box (if so equipped) .......................... 2-44
Cargo floor box ........................................... 2-45
Luggage side box......................................... 2-45
Cargo cover (if so equipped) .......................... 2-45
Luggage hooks............................................ 2-46
Roof rack (if so equipped).............................. 2-47
Coat hooks................................................. 2-48
Rain-sensing auto wiper system
(if so equipped) ........................................... 2-29
Rear window wiper and washer switch.................. 2-30
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch..... 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows ....................................................... 2-48
Power windows ........................................... 2-48
Moonroof (if so equipped).................................. 2-51
Automatic moonroof and sunshades ................. 2-51
Personal lights............................................. 2-53
Interior light control switch ............................. 2-53
Mood lights .................................................... 2-54
Vanity mirror lights............................................ 2-55
Cargo lights.................................................... 2-55
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) .... 2-55
Programming HomeLink® ............................... 2-56
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers .................................................. 2-57
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver ................................................. 2-58
Programming trouble-diagnosis ....................... 2-58
Clearing the programmed information................ 2-58
Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button ........ 2-58
If your vehicle is stolen .................................. 2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Steering wheel
— Horn
— Driver supplemental air bag
— Power steering system
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches
9. Wiper and washer switch
10. Push-button ignition switch
11. Center ventilator
12. Center display/Center color display*/Navigation
system**
13. Heater/air conditioner or
Center multi-function control panel*
— Navigation system**
— Vehicle information and setting buttons
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
— Audio system
14. Hazard warning flasher switch
15. Front passenger supplemental air bag
16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
17. Hood release handle
18. Power lift gate main switch
19. Power seatback switch*
20. Fuse box cover
SSI0627
5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*
21. Parking brake
1. Side ventilator
22. Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch
23. Intelligent Key port
— Audio control*
2. Power lift gate switch*
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control*
3. Headlight, fog light* and turn signal switch
4. Fuel-filler door opener switch
24. Audio system
— Clock
6. Meters and gauges
25. Heated seat switch*
26. Selector lever
27. Front passenger air bag status light
2-2 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28. Power outlet
29. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch*
30. Rear window and outside mirror* defroster switch
31. Heater/air conditioner control or Audio system
32. Glove box
*: if so equipped
**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped).
Instruments and controls 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
1. Instrument brightness control switch
2. Tachometer
3. Speedometer
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning/indicator lights
6. Trip computer switch
7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display
8. Engine coolant temperature gauge
9. Vehicle information display
— Odometer/twin trip odometer
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator
10. RESET switch for trip odometer
The needle indicators may move slightly
after the ignition switch is pushed to the
LOCK position. This is not a malfunction.
SSI0377
2-4 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the trip odometer:
3
Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch
for
*
more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to
zero.
SIC3571
SIC3572
Speedometer
Odometer/twin trip odometer
Odometer/twin trip odometer
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
1
2
The odometer
and twin trip odometer
*
*
Speedometer
are displayed when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).
The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
Changing the display:
3
Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch
on the
*
right side of the combination meter panel
changes the display as follows:
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A
Instruments and controls 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature near the hot (H) end of the
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If gauge is over
the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible. If the engine is
overheated, continued operation of the
vehicle may seriously damage the en-
gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-
HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for immediate action required.
SIC3573
SIC3574
TACHOMETER
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-
perature.
1
engine into the red zone
.
*
The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range when the gauge needle points
CAUTION
1
*
within the zone
shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
2-6 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPASS (if so equipped)
will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge needle reaches “E”.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
.
.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon
as possible. After a few driving trips,
the
light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by
a NISSAN dealer.
SIC3575
SIC3181
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
FUEL GAUGE
B
position, the compass display
will indicate
For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
later in this section.
*
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
registers “E” (Empty).
The low fuel warning
appears on the dot
matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel tank is
getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
preferably before the gauge reaches “E”. There
Instruments and controls 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass
by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also
calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle
on your everyday route. The compass will be
calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete
circles.
To turn on and off the compass manually, push
A
the
switch
while the ignition switch is in
*
the ON position.
SIC0611B
Zone map
2-8 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCE-
DURE
pass point when the vehicle moves to an
area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
The difference between magnetic north and
geographical north is known as variance. In
some areas, this difference can sometimes be
great enough to cause false compass readings.
Follow these instructions to set the variance for
your particular location if this happens:
CAUTION
.
.
Do not install a ski rack, antenna,
etc., which are attached to the
vehicle by means of a magnet. They
affect the operation of the compass.
1. Push the
switch for more than 3
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as it may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance
number on the zone map.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
3. Push the
switch repeatedly until the
new zone number appears in the display,
then release the switch. After you release
the switch, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
.
If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjust-
ment, have the compass checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
.
The compass may not indicate the
correct compass point in tunnels or
while driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct com-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 2-9
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD
models)*
Low tire pressure warning light
Master warning light
High beam indicator light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Overdrive off indicator light
Slip indicator light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light
Seat belt warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Brake warning light
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light
(AWD models)*
Small light indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light
Charge warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Intelligent Key warning light
Cruise indicator light
Front passenger air bag status light
*: if so equipped
CHECKING BULBS
WARNING LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system checked by
a NISSAN dealer.
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and push the ignition switch to the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on (if so equipped):
light (AWD models)
The light comes on when the ignition switch is
pushed to ON. It turns off soon after the engine
is started.
Some indicators and warnings are also dis-
played on the dot matrix crystal display on the
speedometer. (See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID
CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section.)
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
The following lights come on briefly and then go
off (if so equipped):
If the AWD system malfunctions, or the diameter
of the front and the rear wheels are different, the
warning light will either remain illuminated or
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
,
2-10 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
blink. (See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.)
Parking brake indicator:
not worn.
.
If the warning light is still on after
the above operations, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light comes on when the parking brake is
applied.
CAUTION
.
.
If the warning light comes on while
driving there may be a malfunction
in the AWD system. Reduce the
vehicle speed and have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the
light comes on while the engine is running with
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle
and perform the following:
or
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates
the ABS is operational.
If the AWD warning light blinks
when you are driving:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. (See “BRAKE FLUID” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion.)
— blinks rapidly (about twice a
second):
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Pull off the road in a safe area,
and idle the engine. The driving
mode will change to 2WD to
prevent the AWD system from
malfunctioning. If the warning
light turns off, you can drive
again.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.)
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator:
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
brake system checked, and if necessary re-
paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See
“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”
earlier in this section.)
— blinks slowly (about once every
2 seconds):
or
Brake warning light
Pull off the road in a safe area,
and idle the engine. Check that
all tire sizes are the same, tire
pressure is correct and tires are
This light functions for both the parking brake
and the foot brake systems.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN dealer immediately.
Intelligent Key warning light
WARNING
CAUTION
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds
and then turns off.
.
Your brake system may not be
working properly if the warning light
is on. Driving could be dangerous. If
you judge it to be safe, drive care-
fully to the nearest service station
for repairs. Otherwise, have your
vehicle towed because driving it
could be dangerous.
Do not continue driving if the alternator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
This light warns of a malfunction with the
electrical steering lock system (if so equipped)
or the Intelligent Key system.
Engine oil pressure warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is
stopped, it may be impossible to free the
steering lock (if so equipped) or to start the
engine. If the light comes on while the engine is
running, you can drive the vehicle. However in
these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair
as soon as possible.
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
.
.
Pressing the brake pedal with the
engine stopped and/or low brake
fluid level may increase your stop-
ping distance and braking will re-
quire greater pedal effort as well as
pedal travel.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See
“ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.)
Low tire pressure warning light
If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
CAUTION
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
Charge warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not
functioning properly. Turn the engine off and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,
broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a
After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light
illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“5. Starting and driving” section.
Low tire pressure warning:
checked by a NISSAN dealer. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
WARNING
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. The low tire pressure warning
light does not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to
the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
.
.
If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch pushed ON, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with un-
der-inflated tires may permanently
damage the tires and increase the
likelihood of tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light stays on after adjusting the
tire pressure and driving over 16
MPH (25 km/h), have the system
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”
in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
CAUTION
.
.
The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure
to check the tire pressure regularly.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1
minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
If the vehicle is being driven at
speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
km/h), the TPMS may not operate
correctly.
.
Be sure to correctly install the
specified size of tires to the four
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the
Instruments and controls 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
switch is in the ON position, the system does
not activate the warning light for the front
passenger.
Restraint Systems (air bag systems) and/or the
pretensioners may not function properly.
wheels.
For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-
TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section.
Master warning light
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section for precautions on seat belt usage.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the master warning light illuminates if any of the
following are displayed on the dot matrix liquid
crystal display:
Supplemental air bag warning light
WARNING
.
.
.
.
.
No key warning
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning
light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the
supplemental front air bag and supplemental
side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems
and/or pretensioner seat belt are operational.
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-
over air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
tems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
Low fuel warning
Low washer fluid warning
Parking brake release warning
Door/lift gate open warning
See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS-
PLAY” later in this section.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and pretensioner systems needs servicing and
your vehicle must be taken to your nearest
NISSAN dealer.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Seat belt warning light
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
indicator light (AWD models)
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition
switch is pushed to the ON position, and will
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is
fastened.
.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
This light illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1
second.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is
occupied. For 6 seconds after the ignition
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
When selecting the LOCK mode while the
engine is running, this light will illuminate. (See
“ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.)
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental
2-14 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US
gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion (CVT) position indicator light
Front passenger air bag status
light
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, the indicator shows the automatic
selector shift position. (See “CONTINUOUSLY
VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.)
The front passenger air bag status light
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine
is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not
ready for an emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in
the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section.)
For front passenger air bag status light opera-
tion, see “NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG
SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual.
Cruise indicator light
Cruise main switch indicator:
This light illuminates when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The light turns off when
the main switch is pushed again. When the
cruise main switch indicator light illuminates, the
cruise control system is operational. (See
“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.)
High beam indicator light (Blue)
Operation:
The malfunction indicator light will come on in
one of two ways:
This light comes on when the headlight high
beam is on and goes out when the low beam is
selected.
.
Malfunction indicator light on steady — An
emission control system and/or CVT mal-
function has been detected. Check the fuel-
filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Cruise malfunction:
If the malfunction indicator light comes on
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it
may indicate a potential emission control and/or
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal-
function.
If the cruise indicator light blinks while the
engine is running, it may indicate the cruise
control system is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See
“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.)
continue to drive the vehicle. The
light
should turn off after a few driving trips. If the
light does not turn off after a few
driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
The malfunction indicator light may also come on
steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or
if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
.
Malfunction indicator light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
Instruments and controls 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
damage the emission control system.
Overdrive off indicator light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
indicator light
To reduce or avoid emission control system
damage:
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when
the overdrive off mode is selected.
The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This
indicates that the VDC system is not operating.
When the VDC off indicator light and slip
indicator light come on with the VDC system
turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact
that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operat-
ing, for example the VDC system may not be
functioning properly. Have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction occurs in
the system, the VDC system function will be
canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For
additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC
CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
For additional information, see ““CONTINU-
OUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
Slip indicator light
This light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting
the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction
limits. The road surface may be slippery.
The malfunction indicator light may stop
blinking and remain on.
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
Small light indicator light
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime
CAUTION
The light comes on when the front park, side
marker, tail and license plate lights are on.
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
and/or CVT system checked and re-
paired as necessary could lead to poor
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and
possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
A chime will sound if the driver side door is
opened while the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or
LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the
Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take
the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the
vehicle.
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
The light flashes when the turn signal switch
lever or hazard switch is turned on.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY
Light reminder chime
A chime will sound when the driver side door is
opened with the light switch in the
position and the ignition switch in the ACC
or OFF position.
or
Turn the light switch off when you leave the
vehicle.
Parking brake reminder chime
The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle and
release the parking brake.
Seat belt warning chime
SIC3576
The chime will sound for about 6 seconds
unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
1
The dot matrix liquid crystal display
is
*
located in the speedometer, and it displays,
the key operation information and other warn-
ings and information.
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the warning
sound is heard.
For the detail about the Intelligent Key System,
see “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIC3577
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
2. Steering lock release malfunction
indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the steering wheel
cannot be released from the LOCK position.
INDICATORS FOR OPERATION
1. Engine start operation indicator
This indicator appears when the selector lever is
in the P (Park) position.
You can start the engine directly in any position.
If this indicator appears, push the push-button
ignition switch while lightly turning the steering
This indicator means that the engine will start by
2-18 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wheel right and left.
SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the selector
lever to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push
the ignition switch ? ignition switch position
is turned to ON) ? PUSH warning ?
(Push the ignition switch ? ignition switch
position is turned to OFF)
Unregistered key:
The warning appears when the ignition switch is
pushed from the LOCK position and the key
cannot be recognized by the system. You cannot
start the engine with an unregistered key. Use
the registered key.
3. Key insertion indicator
This indicator appears when the key needs to be
inserted into the key port.
If this indicator appears, insert the key into the
key port in the correct direction. (See “PUSH-
BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Start-
ing and driving” section.)
8. Key battery discharge indicator
This indicator appears when the key battery is
running out of power.
See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for
more details.
4. Key removal indicator
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with
a new one. (See “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
6. SHIFT “P” warning
This indicator appears when the driver’s door is
opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and the key placed in the key
port. A key reminder chime also sounds.
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever
in any position except the P (Park) position.
9. Parking brake release warning
This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is
applied.
If this warning appears, move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position or push the ignition
switch to the ON position.
If this indicator appears, remove the key from the
key port and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.
10. Low fuel warning
An inside warning chime will also sound. (See
“INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.)
5. NO KEY warning
This warning appears in either of the following
conditions.
This warning appears when the fuel level in the
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches the empty (E) position.
7. “PUSH” warning
No key inside the vehicle:
This warning appears when the selector lever is
moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition
switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”
warning appears.
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches
the empty (E) position.
The warning appears when the door is closed
with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle
and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle.
To push the ignition switch to the OFF position,
perform the following procedure:
Instruments and controls 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE
1. Engine oil replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset
the distance for changing the engine oil. (See
“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)
11. Low washer fluid warning
This warning appears when the washer tank fluid
is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary.
(See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
12. Door/lift gate open warning (ignition
switch is in the ON position)
2. Oil filter replacement indicator
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or
the lift gate are open or not closed securely. The
vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the
display.
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset
the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See
“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)
13. “Time to rest” indicator
3. Tire replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set “time to
rest” indicator activates. You can set the time for
up to 6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in
this section.)
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for replacing tires. You can set or reset the
distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COM-
PUTER” later in this section.)
14. Low outside temperature warning
4. “OTHER” indicator
This warning appears if the outside temperature
is below 378F (38C). The warning can be set not
to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later
in this section.)
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil
filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance
for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPU-
TER” later in this section.)
More maintenance reminders are also available
on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE
INFO BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air
conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section.)
SIC3578
2-20 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current fuel consumption ? Average fuel
consumption and speed ? Elapsed time and
trip odometer ? Distance to empty (dte) ?
Outside air temperature (ICY) ? Setting ?
Warning check
SIC3580
SIC3673
Current fuel consumption
TRIP COMPUTER
The current fuel consumption mode shows the
current fuel consumption.
Switches for the trip computer are located on
the right side of the combination meter panel. To
operate the trip computer, push the side or front
of the switches as shown above.
A
*
switch
B
switch
*
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
A
*
selected by pushing the
switch
.
A
Each time the switch
is pushed, the
*
display will change as follows:
Instruments and controls 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is
B
done by pushing the
switch
for longer
*
than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is
also reset at the same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The
first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows
“——”.
SIC3674
SIC3675
Average fuel consumption (MPG or l
(liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or km/h)
Elapsed time and trip odometer (mls or
km)
Fuel consumption:
Elapsed time:
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
The elapsed time mode shows the time since
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
the last reset. The displayed time can be reset
B
B
Resetting is done by pushing the
switch
by pushing the
switch
for longer than
*
*
for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is
also reset at the same time.)
1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the
same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the
display shows “——”.
Trip odometer:
The trip odometer mode shows the total
distance the vehicle has been driven since the
last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the
B
Speed:
switch
for longer than 1 second. (The
*
The average speed mode shows the average
elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)
2-22 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pushed to the OFF position may continue to
be displayed.
.
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-
rily change the display.
SIC3676
SIC3677
Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)
Outside air temperature (ICY — 8F or 8C)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or
8C in the range of −22 to 1408F (−30 to 608C).
The outside air temperature mode includes a low
temperature warning feature. If the outside air
temperature is below 378F (38C), the warning is
displayed on the screen.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is
displayed on the screen.
The outside temperature sensor is located in
front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected
by road or engine heat, wind directions and
other driving conditions. The display may differ
from the actual outside temperature or the
temperature displayed on various signs or bill-
boards.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
display will change to “——”.
.
If the amount of fuel added is small, the
display just before the ignition switch is
Instruments and controls 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
OTHER
ALERT:
Select this submenu and set or reset the
distance for replacing items other than the
engine oil, oil filter and tires.
Alert menu can be set to notify the following
items.
.
TIME TO REST
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
Select this submenu to specify when the
“TIME TO REST” indicator activates.
OPTIONS:
.
ICY
The 3 option menus can be set to your
preference.
Select this submenu to display the low
outside temperature warning.
.
.
.
LANGUAGE
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
Select this submenu to choose English or
French for display.
SIC3678
MAINTENANCE:
Setting
UNIT
The maintenance intervals of the following items
can be set or reset for the reminders.
Setting cannot be made while driving. A
message “Setting can only be operated
when stopped” is also displayed on the dot
matrix crystal display.
Select this submenu to choose the unit from
MPG or l/100 km.
.
.
.
ENGINE OIL
DIAL EFFECTS
Select this submenu to set or reset the
distance for changing the engine oil.
A
B
*
The
switch
and
switch
are
*
Select this menu to set the dial effects
described below to on or off.
used in the setting mode to select and decide a
menu.
OIL FILTER
— The indicator needles sweep in the
meters and the ring illumination will be
brightened gradually when the engine is
started.
Select this submenu to set or reset the
distance for replacing the oil filter.
SKIP:
A
Push the
warning check mode.
switch
to move to the
*
TIRE
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
Select this submenu to set or reset the
distance for replacing tires.
B
*
Push the
switch
to select other menus.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
SKIP:
A
*
Push the
warning check mode.
switch
to move to the
B
*
Push the
switch
to select other menus.
DETAIL:
This item is available only when a warning is
displayed.
Select this menu to see the details of warnings.
SIC3679
SIC2133
Your vehicle has two types of security systems,
as follows:
Warning check
To see if there are any of the following warnings
and corresponding details, select this menu.
.
.
Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
.
.
.
.
.
No key warning
Low fuel warning
The security condition will be shown by the
security indicator light.
Low washer fluid warning
Parking brake release warning
Door/lift gate open warning
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors
or lift gate when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
Instruments and controls 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vibration occurs.
.
the key — master or mechanical
A
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior
or exterior vehicle components in all situations.
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,
and always lock it when unattended. Be aware
of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit
areas whenever possible.
5. Confirm that the security indicator light
*
comes on. The security indicator light stays
on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle
security system is now pre-armed. After
about 30 seconds the vehicle security
system automatically shifts into the armed
phase. The security light begins to flash
once every approximately 3 seconds. If,
during this 30-second pre-arm time period,
the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is
pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not
arm.
Many devices offering additional protection,
such as component locks, identification markers,
and tracking systems, are available at auto
supply stores and specialty shops. Your
NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.
Check with your insurance company to see if
you may be eligible for discounts for various
theft protection features.
Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors, hood and lift gate locked
with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. When pushing the ignition switch
to the ACC or ON position, the system will
be released.
SIC1699A
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows.
The system can be armed even if the
windows are open.
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Carry the Intelligent Key.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the follow-
ing alarm:
4. Close all doors, hood and lift gate. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with:
.
The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
.
the lock button
Key
on the Intelligent
.
The alarm automatically turns off after
approximately 1 minute. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again.
.
.
any request switch
the power door lock switch
2-26 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The alarm is activated by:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
.
Unlocking the door without using the button
on the Intelligent Key, the request switch or
the key. (Even if the door is opened by
releasing the door inside lock knob, the
alarm will activate.)
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY
RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
.
Opening the hood.
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the unlock button
on the Intelligent
Key, pushing the request switch or using the key.
If the system does not operate as de-
scribed above, have it checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
SIC1699A
Security indicator light
The security indicator light
A
*
indicates the
status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
TEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key. Never leave these keys in the
vehicle.
The light blinks after the ignition switch was in
the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function
indicates the security systems equipped on the
vehicle are operational.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY - CARD SLOT)
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
da. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions;
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer
for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
Instruments and controls 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
service as soon as possible. Please bring
all registered keys that you have when
visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm windshield with
the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
2-28 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Pull the lever toward you
to operate the
*
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
SIC4015
SIC4017
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS-
TEM (if so equipped)
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can auto-
matically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper
speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle
speed by using the rain sensor located on the
upper part of the windshield.
1
*
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
A
adjusted by turning the knob toward
*
B
(Slower) or
(Faster).
*
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push
For models with the rain-sensing auto wiper
system, see “RAIN-SENSING AUTO WI-
PER SYSTEM” later in this section.
1
the lever down to the AUTO position
. The
*
wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
2
*
Low — continuous low speed operation
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted
3
High — continuous high speed operation
*
2
*
by turning the knob toward the front
(High)
4
Push the lever up
operation of the wiper.
to have one sweep
*
3
or toward the rear
(Low).
*
Instruments and controls 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
.
.
High — High sensitive operation
Low — Low sensitive operation
and water.
WARNING
If the rear window wiper operation is
interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that is
on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-
mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again
to operate the wiper.
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the rear window
glass and obscure your vision. Warm
the rear window with the defroster
before you wash the rear window.
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off,
push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull
down the lever to the LO or HI position.
CAUTION
Do not touch the rain sensor and
around it when the wiper switch is in
the INT position and the ignition switch
is in the ON position. The wipers may
operate unexpectedly and cause to an
injury or a wiper damage.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
.
.
The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-
tended for use during rain. If the switch
is left in the INT position, the wipers
may operate unexpectedly when dirt,
fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck
on or around the sensor. The wipers
may also operate when exhaust gas or
moisture affect the rain sensor.
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
operate if rain does not hit the rain
sensor even if it is raining.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH
To defog/defrost the rear window glass and
outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine
1
and push the switch
on. The indicator light
*
2
will come on. Push the switch again to turn
*
the defroster off.
It will automatically turn off in approximately 15
minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
SIC4019
SIC3584
Type A
The rear window wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
to operate the wiper.
1
*
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
2
*
Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-
tion
3
Push the switch forward
to operate the
*
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
SIC3667
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type B
Instruments and controls 2-31
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime
running lights are active (Canada only),
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
This way the life of the xenon head-
lights is not reduced.
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
.
.
When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent
an electric shock, never attempt to
modify or disassemble. Always have
your xenon headlights replaced at a
NISSAN dealer.
.
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
cally decrease, the light will start
blinking, or the color of the light will
become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
Xenon headlights provide consider-
ably more light than conventional
headlights. If they are not correctly
aimed, they might temporarily blind
an oncoming driver or the driver
ahead of you and cause a serious
accident. If headlights are not aimed
correctly, immediately take your ve-
hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have
the headlights adjusted correctly.
SIC3668
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Lighting
1
*
Turn the switch to the
position:
The front park, side marker, tail, license
plate and instrument lights will come on.
2
*
Turn the switch to the
position:
Headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,
its brightness or color varies slightly. However,
the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
.
The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
2-32 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The autolight system can turn on the headlights
automatically when it is dark and turn off the
headlights when it is light.
If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened and this
condition is continued, the headlights remain on
for 5 minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay:
You can keep the headlights on for up to 180
seconds after you push the ignition switch to
OFF and open any door then close all the doors.
You can adjust the period of the automatic
headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to
180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45
seconds.
SIC3669
SAA0642A
Be sure not to put anything on top of the
Autolight system (if so equipped)
A
*
photo sensor
located on the top of the
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically.
instrument panel. The photo sensor con-
trols the autolight; if it is covered, the
photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights will illuminate.
For automatic headlights off delay setting, see
“Auto Headlights Off Delay” in the “4. Monitor,
heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section.
To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
1
*
AUTO position
.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch
to the OFF,
or
position.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the headlight switch is in the
or
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position while the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the lights will automatically turn off 5
minutes after the ignition switch has been
pushed to the OFF position.
position or in the
headlight switch to the
illumination when driving at night.
position. Turn the
position for full
If the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started, the daytime running lights do not
illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate
once the parking brake is released. The daytime
running lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position.
When the headlight switch remains in the
or
position after the lights automatically
turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition
switch is pushed to the ON position.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
When you turn on the headlight
switch again after the lights auto-
matically turn off, the lights will not
turn off automatically. Be sure to
turn the light switch to the OFF
position when you leave the vehicle
for extended periods of time, other-
wise the battery will be discharged.
When the daytime running light system
is active, tail lights on your vehicle are
not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
your headlights. Failure to do so could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.
SIC3670
Headlight beam select
1
*
To select the low beam, put the lever in the
neutral position as shown.
2
*
To select the high beam, push the lever
forward while the switch is in the
position. Pull it back to select the low beam.
Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running for
extended periods of time even if the
headlights turn off automatically.
3
*
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the
headlight high beam even when the head-
light switch is in the OFF position.
Battery saver system
A chime will sound when the driver side door is
opened with the light switch in the
position and the ignition switch in the ACC,
OFF or LOCK position.
Daytime running light system (Canada
only)
The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
nate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights
or
2-34 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIC3585
SIC3671
SIC3672
Instrument brightness control
The instrument brightness control operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
1 Turn signal
*
switch to the
to the
position, then turn the switch
position. To turn them off, turn the
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning
direction. When the turn is completed, the turn
signals cancel automatically.
A
Pushing the control switch
once will change
*
switch to the OFF position.
the brightness to the night mode.
The headlights must be on for the fog lights to
operate.
B
Pushing the control switch
once will change
*
2 Lane change signal
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where lights begin flashing.
*
the brightness to the day mode.
To adjust the brightness of instrument panel
lights, push the control switches. Pushing the
A
upper switch
will brighten the lights. When
*
the brightness reaches the maximum level, a
B
beep will sound. The lower switch
dims the
*
lights. Repeatedly pushing the lower switch will
turn the lights off and a beep will sound.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
HORN
.
Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are
on.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition
switch in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
SIC2574
SIC3586
A
*
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights will flash.
To sound the horn, push the pad area
steering wheel.
of the
WARNING
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
.
.
If stopping for an emergency, be
sure to move the vehicle well off the
road.
Do not use the hazard warning
flashers while moving on the high-
way unless unusual circumstances
force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard
to other traffic.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
.
.
.
Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately
with a dry cloth.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, thinner, or any similar
materials.
If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
SIC2770
.
.
.
The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the
engine is not running.
The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The
switches located on the center console and rear
doors (if so equipped for rear seats) can be
operated independently of each other.
Do not use the seat heater for
extended periods or when no one
is using the seat.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.
Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
1
*
For high heat, push the HI (High) side of
the switch.
2
*
For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of
the switch.
.
Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in
damage to the heater.
3
*
The indicator light in the switch
illuminate when the heater is on.
will
Instruments and controls 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLOCK
1
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to
the level position. Make sure the indicator
light goes off.
5. Push the CLOCK button
or AUDIO
*
2
knob
to enter.
*
The display will return to the regular clock
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
display after 10 seconds.
If the power supply is disconnected, the clock
will not indicate the correct time.
Readjust the time.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
off the switch.
MODELS WITH COLOR DISPLAY
For adjusting the time, see “Clock settings” in
the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems” section.
SIC3649
MODELS WITHOUT COLOR DISPLAY
The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays the
time when the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
Adjusting the time
1
1. Push and hold the CLOCK button
for
*
more than 2 seconds until the display shows
“Hour Adjust”.
2
*
2. Turn the AUDIO knob
to adjust hours.
1
3. Push the CLOCK button
or AUDIO
*
2
*
knob
to enter. The display will show
“Minute Adjust”.
2
*
4. Turn the AUDIO knob
to adjust minutes.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
POWER OUTLET
SIC1881
SIC3652
SIC3587
Console box — Type A
Center console
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most
driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.
If maximum engine power is needed to free a
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator will illuminate.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE
DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.)
SIC3653
SIC3651
Console box — Type B
Cargo area
Instruments and controls 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY (if so equipped)
To use the power outlet, pull the cover as
illustrated.
contact the outlet.
CAUTION
.
.
The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.
Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power
draw. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.
.
.
Use power outlet with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
SIC3588
To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down and
Avoid using power outlet when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear
window defroster is on.
1
release it
.
*
2
To empty the ashtray, pull out
.
*
.
.
This power outlet is not designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit.
The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
3
*
Push the lighter in all the way
, then release
it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out.
Return the lighter to its original position after
use.
.
.
Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical acces-
sory being used is turned OFF.
When not in use, be sure to close
the cap. Do not allow water to
2-40 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
.
.
The cigarette lighter socket is a
power source for the cigarette light-
er element only. The use of the
cigarette lighter socket as a power
source for any other accessory is
not recommended.
CAUTION
.
.
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used
to prevent spilling the drink. If the
liquid is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
Do not use any other power outlet
for an accessory lighter.
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
SIC3118
Front
1
*
To open the cup holder, push the lid
.
To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull it up as
2
*
illustrated
.
Instruments and controls 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
direct sunlight. The heat may da-
mage the glasses.
SIC3042
SIC3589
Rear
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
1
*
To open the sunglasses holder, push
.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not use for anything other than
glasses.
Do not leave glasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in
2-42 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIC3590
SIC3654
Front
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE BOX
A
When the lever
*
(driver’s seat side) is pulled,
the upper case is available for storing some
WARNING
B
*
small items. When the lever
ger’s seat side) is pulled, the bottom case is
available for storing some larger ones.
(front passen-
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
1
*
To open the glove box, pull the handle
.
To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
2
3
To lock
/unlock
the glove box, use the
*
*
mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage,
see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
Instruments and controls 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIC3591
SIC3593
SIC3655
Rear
Type A
1
*
2
*
To open, push the knob
and pull out
.
STORAGE BOX (if so equipped)
1
*
To open, push the storage box lid
illustrated.
as
2
*
The inner tray can be removed
as illustrated.
Do not place valuable items in the storage
box.
Do not use the storage box as an ashtray.
SIC3656
Type B
2-44 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARGO FLOOR BOX
Type A
1. To open the cargo floor box, pull the strap
A
*
.
B
2. Remove the strap
from the back side of
*
the board and hang it on the opening of the
lift gate.
Type B
A
To open the cargo floor box, push
push the lid until the lock latches.
. To close,
to make
*
B
The net partitions can be removed
a larger storage space.
*
SIC3594
The cargo floor box needs to be removed when
you need a spare tire. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.)
LUGGAGE SIDE BOX
To open the luggage side box, pull up the strap.
CAUTION
To avoid damage, do not load more
than 22 lbs (10 kg) of cargo into the
cargo floor box.
SIC3595
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo
area hidden from the outside.
To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both
1
*
sides on the hooks
.
Instruments and controls 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the sub cover, hang the straps on the
restraint top tether strap is da-
maged.
2
back of the headrest
.
*
To stow the cargo cover, remove it from the
hooks and hold until it is retracted.
— If the cargo cover contacts the
top tether strap when it is at-
tached to the top tether anchor,
remove the cargo cover from the
vehicle or secure it on the cargo
floor below its attachment loca-
tion. If the cargo cover is not
removed, it may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.
To remove the cargo cover, stow the cover and
pull the left side of the holder to the opposite
3
*
side
.
WARNING
.
Never put anything on the cargo
cover, no matter how small. Any
object on it could cause an injury
in an accident or sudden stop.
— Do not allow cargo to contact
the top tether strap when it is
attached to the top tether an-
chor. Properly secure the cargo
so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or that con-
tacts the top tether strap may
damage the top tether strap
during a collision.
.
.
Close the cargo cover when folding
the rear seat.
Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
SIC3596
LUGGAGE HOOKS
WARNING
.
Always make sure that the cargo is
properly secured. Use the suitable
.
Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
2-46 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical and consumer information” section.
ropes and hooks.
.
Unsecured cargo can become dan-
gerous in an accident or sudden
stop.
WARNING
.
.
Drive extra carefully when the vehi-
cle is loaded at or near the cargo
carrying capacity, especially if the
significant portion of that load is
carried on the roof rack.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than
A
B
22 lb (10 kg) * or 7 lb (3 kg) * to a
Heavy loading of the roof rack has
the potential to affect the vehicle
stability and handling during sud-
den or unusual handling maneuvers.
single hook.
SIC3597
.
.
.
Roof rack load should be evenly
distributed.
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Do not exceed maximum roof rack
load weight capacity.
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof
rack. Do not load more than 165 lb (75 kg)
(black) or 220 lb (100 kg) (silver) on the roof
rails. Observe the maximum load limit shown on
the crossbars or roof carriers when you attach
them on the roof rails. Contact a NISSAN dealer
for crossbar or other equipment information. Be
careful that your vehicle does not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-
cated on the driver’s door pillar). For more
information regarding GVWR and GAWR, see
“VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
CAUTION
Use care when placing or removing
items from the roof rack. If you cannot
comfortably lift the items onto the roof
Instruments and controls 2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
rack from the ground, use a ladder or
stool.
WARNING
.
.
Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before
closing the windows. Use the win-
dow lock switch to prevent unex-
pected use of the power windows.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols and become trapped in the
window. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
SIC3505
COAT HOOKS
The coat hooks are equipped beside the rear
personal lights.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to
the OFF position. If the driver’s or front
passenger’s door is opened during this period
of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is
canceled.
CAUTION
Do not place items which are more than
2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.
2-48 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locking passengers’ windows
C
When the lock button
is pushed in, only the
*
driver side window can be opened or closed.
Push it in again to cancel.
SIC3283A
SIC3241
Main power window switch (driver’s
Passenger side power window switch
side)
1. Driver side window
The passenger side switch will open or close
only the corresponding window. To open or
close the window, push down or pull up the
switch and hold it.
2. Front passenger side window
3. Rear left passenger side window
4. Rear right passenger side window
5. Window lock button
A
To open or close the window, push down
or
*
B
pull up
the switch and hold it. The main
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.
*
Instruments and controls 2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the door.
Auto reverse function
WARNING
3. Open the window completely by operating
the power window switch.
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
window.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed completely.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete.
If the control unit detects something caught in
the window as it is closing, the window will be
immediately lowered.
6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other
windows.
SIC3285
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
pushed to the OFF position.
Automatic operation (for front door win-
dows)
If the power window automatic function does
not operate properly after performing the pro-
cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
To fully open or close the window, completely
push down or pull up the switch and release it; it
need not be held. The window will automatically
open or close all the way. To stop the window,
just push or lift the switch in the opposite
direction.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window
occurs.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the
window to open or close until the switch is
released.
If the windows do not close automatically
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the
following procedure to initialize the power
window system.
2-50 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF AND SUN-
SHADES
WARNING
The moonroof and sunshades only operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
.
.
In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts
and child restraints.
The automatic moonroof and sunshades are
operational for about 45 seconds, even if the
ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If
the driver’s door or the passenger’s door is
opened during this period of about 45 seconds,
power to the moonroof and sunshades is
canceled.
Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.
SIC3598
CAUTION
Sliding sunshade and moonroof
.
Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.
1
When the OPEN side
of the moonroof
*
switch is pushed, the front and rear sunshades
will fully open. When the switch is pushed again,
the moonroof will fully open.
.
.
Do not place any heavy object on
the moonroof or surrounding area.
2
*
When the CLOSE side
of the moonroof
switch is pushed, the moonroof will automati-
cally close. Push the switch again, and the front
and rear sunshades will close.
Do not push or pull on the sun-
shade. Doing so can damage the
sunshade.
When the OPEN or CLOSE side of the moon-
3
roof switch is pushed to the second detent (
*
4
or
), both the sunshade and moonroof will
*
open or close.
To stop the sunshades or moonroof during the
Instruments and controls 2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
operation, push either of the OPEN
, CLOSE
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof and sunshades are closed by
automatic operation when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position.
4. Push and hold the CLOSE side
moonroof switch for 10 seconds.
of the
*
*
2
*
5
*
or UP
of the switch.
5. The moonroof and sunshades will fully open
and then close.
Tilting moonroof
To tilt up the moonroof, push the moonroof
5
*
switch to the up position
.
6. Check if the moonroof switch operates
normally.
If the moonroof and sunshades cannot be
closed automatically when the auto reverse
function activates due to a malfunction, push
2
To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the
5
*
2
up position
the switch.
or push the CLOSE side
of
*
If the moonroof does not operate properly after
performing the procedure above, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
and hold the CLOSE side
switch.
of the moonroof
*
When the moonroof is tilted up, push the
CLOSE side of the moonroof switch to the
4
second detent
. The moonroof will tilt down
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
*
and the sunshades will close.
Auto reverse function
WARNING
If the moonroof does not operate
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
moonroof.
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize the
moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
2
*
pushing the CLOSE side
roof switch.
of the moon-
2
2. Push and hold the CLOSE side
moonroof switch.
of the
If the control unit detects something caught in
the moonroof and sunshades when they are
closing, the moonroof will be immediately
opened.
*
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof or sunshade moves slightly to
the closed position.
2-52 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
SIC3250
SIC3251
SIC3249
PERSONAL LIGHTS
Rear
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on
or off.
INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
MAP LIGHTS
The interior light control switch has three
positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on
or off.
ON position
1
When the switch is in the ON position
the
*
map lights and rear personal lights will illumi-
nate.
DOOR position
2
When the switch is in the DOOR position
,
*
the map lights and rear personal lights will
illuminate under the following conditions:
.
ignition switch is switched to the LOCK
position
Instruments and controls 2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MOOD LIGHTS
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights go off.
.
doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-
LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door
handle request switch with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position
OFF position
3
When the switch is in the OFF position
, the
*
lights will not illuminate, regardless of the
condition.
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
.
.
any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could
result in a discharged battery.
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position
SIC3599
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights go off.
Map lights
A
*
The mood lights
located in the following
positions will illuminate whenever the headlight
switch is in the or position.
The lights will also turn off after 30
minutes when the lights remain illumi-
nated after the ignition switch has been
pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
.
.
.
next to the map lights
under the instrument panel
under the driver’s power window switch
When the auto interior illumination is set to the
OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION
AND SETTINGS” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air
conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section), the lights will illuminate under
the following condition:
The mood lights can be adjusted with the
illumination control buttons.
See “Instrument brightness control” earlier in
this section.
.
any door is opened with the ignition switch
in any position
2-54 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HomeLink® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
CARGO LIGHTS
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
.
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and
security systems.
.
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-
connected, HomeLink® will retain all pro-
gramming.
SIC2131A
SIC2064
1
When the switch is in the ON position
, the
*
Once HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
programmed, retain the original transmit-
ter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
For additional information, see “PRO-
GRAMMING HomeLink®” later in this sec-
tion.
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when
the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
light illuminates while the lift gate is opened.
When the lift gate is closed, the light will turn off.
When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.
2
*
When the switch is in the OFF position
light will turn off.
, the
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes
when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes
when the light remain illuminated to pre-
vent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
WARNING
.
Do not use HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and
Instruments and controls 2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1996) have “rolling code protection”. To pro-
gram a garage door opener equipped with
“rolling code protection”; you will need to use
a ladder to get up to the garage door opener
motor to be able to access the “smart or learn”
program button.
reverse features as required by
federal safety standards. (These
standards became effective for
opener models manufactured after
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object in the
path of a closing garage door and
then automatically stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or
death.
SIC3612
.
.
During programming procedure,
your garage door or security gate
may open or close. Make sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door, gate, etc. that you are
programming.
1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer Home-
Link® buttons (to clear the memory) until the
A
indicator light
blinks (after 20 seconds).
*
Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 in (20 to 70 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface.
Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
To program your HomeLink® Transceiver to
operate a garage door, gate, or entry door
opener, home or office lighting, you need to be
at the same location as the device. Note:
Garage door openers (manufactured after
2-56 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
button - releasing when the device begins to
activate.
Push and release the HomeLink® button up
to three times to complete the training.
5. If the indicator light on HomeLink® blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train Home-
Link®, completing the programming may
require a ladder and another person for
convenience.
8. Your HomeLink® button should now be
programmed. To program the remaining
HomeLink® buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only.
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
“clear” all previously programmed Home-
Link® buttons.
6. Push and release the program button
located on the garage door opener’s motor
to activate the “training mode”. This button is
usually located near the antenna wire that
hangs down from the motor. If the wire
originates from under a light lens, you will
need to remove the lens to access the
training button.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, please
refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.
homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
SIC3613
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push and
hold both the HomeLink® button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter
button.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR CA-
NADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after
2 seconds. To program your hand-held trans-
mitter to HomeLink®, continue to push and hold
the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 through 4
under “Programming HomeLink®”) while you
push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator
light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-
gramming).
NOTE:
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
Once you have pushed and released
the training button on the garage door
opener’s motor and the “training light”
is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to
perform step 7. For convenience, use
the help of a second person to assist
when performing this step.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on HomeLink® flashes, changing from a
“slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. This could
take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator
light blinks rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapidly flashing light indicates
successful programming. To activate the
garage door or other programmed device,
push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing and
releasing the garage door opener training
button) and firmly push and release the
HomeLink® button you’ve just programmed.
Instruments and controls 2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink®
surface. Hold the transmitter in that position
for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not
programmed within that time, try holding the
transmitter in another position - keeping the
indicator light in view at all times.
3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.
If programming a garage door opener, etc.,
it is advised to unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener com-
ponents.
4. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.
OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVER-
SAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLink®
buttons.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the
garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the
appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-
FORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to
clear all programming, push and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (in approximately 20
seconds).
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the
manufacturer or dealer of those devices for
additional information.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNO-
SIS
If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE Home-
Link® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transcei-
ver button, complete the following.
.
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
.
position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the Home-
Link® surface.
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. Do not release the button until step
4 has been completed.
FCC Notice:
.
.
push and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption.
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127
mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.
position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in
2-58 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
device must accept any interference that
may be received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
The transmitter has been tested and
complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the device.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
Instruments and controls 2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
2-60 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ............................................................... 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys ............ 3-2
Intelligent Key system...................................... 3-3
Mechanical key.............................................. 3-4
Locking with mechanical key............................. 3-5
Hood ............................................................ 3-18
Lift gate ......................................................... 3-19
Operating manual lift gate .............................. 3-19
Operating power lift gate (if so equipped).......... 3-19
Lift gate release........................................... 3-23
Fuel-filler door ................................................. 3-23
Opening fuel-filler door.................................. 3-23
Fuel-filler cap .............................................. 3-24
Tilt/telescopic steering ...................................... 3-25
Manual operation ......................................... 3-25
Electric operation ......................................... 3-26
Sun visors ...................................................... 3-26
Mirrors........................................................... 3-27
Inside mirror................................................ 3-27
Outside mirrors............................................ 3-29
Vanity mirror................................................ 3-30
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)............. 3-30
Entry/exit function......................................... 3-30
Memory storage........................................... 3-31
System operation ......................................... 3-32
Opening and closing windows with the
mechanical key .............................................. 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob ........................... 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-6
Automatic door locks ...................................... 3-6
Child safety rear door lock ............................... 3-7
Intelligent Key system.......................................... 3-7
Intelligent Key operating range .......................... 3-9
Door locks/unlocks precaution .......................... 3-9
Intelligent Key operation................................. 3-10
Battery saver system..................................... 3-13
Warning signals........................................... 3-13
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-14
Remote keyless entry system .............................. 3-15
How to use remote keyless entry system ........... 3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYS
1. Master key (2)
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If
you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN
does not record any key numbers so it is very
important to keep track of your key number plate.
2. Mechanical key (inside the key) (2)
3. Key number plate (1)
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
TEM KEYS
Your vehicle can only be driven with the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, this key can be
duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
SPA2406
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can
duplicate your existing key. As many as 4 keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should bring
all the registered keys that you have to a
NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because
the registration process will erase the memory of
all key codes previously registered into the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the
registration process, these components will only
recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System during registration. Any key
that is not given to your dealer at the time of
registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
Type A
SPA2431
Type B
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ging it, please note the following.
prevent the Intelligent Key from
unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, please con-
tact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
— The Intelligent Key is water
resistant; however, wetting may
damage the Intelligent Key. If
the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is com-
pletely dry.
Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System key, which contains
an electrical transponder, to come in
contact with salt water. This could
cause the system to malfunction.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it
against another object.
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
for an extended period in a
place where temperatures ex-
ceed 1408F (608C).
— Do not change or modify the
Intelligent Key.
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-
nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.
— Do not use a magnet key holder.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
near an electric appliance such
as a television set, personal
computer or cellular phone.
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key
to come into contact with water
or salt water, and do not wash it
CAUTION
in
a
washing machine. This
could affect the system function.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when driving. The Intelli-
gent Key is a precision device with a
built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-
.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key. This will
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS
CAUTION
WARNING
Always carry the mechanical key in-
stalled in the key.
.
Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping
to prevent persons from being
thrown from the vehicle. This also
helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors,
and will help keep out intruders.
VALET HAND-OFF
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself after removing the
mechanical key to protect your belongings.
To prevent the glove box from being opened
during valet hand-off, follow the procedures
below.
.
.
Before opening any door, always
look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
SPA2033
1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-
telligent Key.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
MECHANICAL KEY
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob at the back of the key.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping
the mechanical key in your pocket or bag.
Insert the mechanical key into the Intelligent
Key when you retrieve your vehicle.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the key until the lock knob returns to the lock
position.
For glove box lock, see “STORAGE” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors and glove box, if they are equipped with a
key cylinder.
See “DOORS” later in this section and “STO-
RAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor,
heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section.)
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY
The driver’s door key operation also allows you
to open and close all door windows.
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key
cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second. The door is unlocked and the
window keeps opening while turning the key.
This function can also be performed by pushing
and holding the door UNLOCK button of the
key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYS-
TEM” later in this section.)
SPA2432
SPA2465
LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
The power door lock system allows you to lock
or unlock all doors simultaneously using the
mechanical key.
To lock the door individually, move the inside
To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key
cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second. The door is locked and the
window keeps closing while turning the key.
1
*
lock knob to the lock position
door.
then close the
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the
1
*
2
front of the vehicle
will lock all doors.
unlock position
.
*
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once
When locking the door without Intelligent
Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent
Key inside the vehicle.
2
*
to the rear of the vehicle
will unlock the
driver’s door. After returning the key to the
3
neutral position
, turning it to the rear
*
again within 1 minute will unlock all doors.
.
You can switch the lock system to the mode
that allows you to open all the doors when
the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
switch to the unlock position
Lockout protection
.
2. Push the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
*
3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds of
performing step 2:
When the power door lock switch (driver or front
passenger) is moved to the lock position with
the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open,
all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With
the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in the
Intelligent Key port) and any door open, all doors
will unlock automatically and a chime will sound
after the door is closed.
.
.
To change AUTO UNLOCK settings:
push and hold the power door lock
switch to the
position (UNLOCK)
for more than 5 seconds.
To change AUTO LOCK settings: push
and hold the power door lock switch to
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
the
position (LOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
SPA2300
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
.
.
All doors will be locked automatically when
the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24
km/h).
5. The ignition must be placed in the OFF and
ON position again between each setting
change.
Operating the power door lock switch will lock
or unlock all the doors. The switches are located
on the driver’s and front passenger’s door
armrests.
All doors will be unlocked automatically
when the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position.
To lock the doors, push the power door lock
The automatic lock and unlock functions
can be deactivated or activated indepen-
dently of each other.
1
switch to the lock position
with the driver’s
*
or front passenger’s door open, then close the
door.
To deactivate or activate the automatic lock or
unlock system, perform the following procedure:
When locking the door this way, be certain
not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the
vehicle.
1. Close all doors.
To unlock the doors, push the power door lock
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehi-
cle.
.
.
Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
Never leave the Intelligent Key in
the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that radio
waves may affect aircraft navigation
and communication systems. Do not
operate the Intelligent Key while on
an airplane. Make sure the buttons
are not operated unintentionally
when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
under the following operating conditions.
SPA2433
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
.
When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broad-
casting station.
The child safety rear door lock helps prevent
doors from being opened accidentally, espe-
cially when small children are in the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function
or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or condi-
tions may affect the Intelligent Key system
operation.
When the levers are in the lock position
.
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
1
, the rear doors can be opened only
*
from the outside.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock
.
.
.
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
2
*
position
.
When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
computer.
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
cellular phone.
.
When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent
the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to
operate the vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-
er.
CAUTION
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could affect
the system function.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
.
.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-
ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as
signals from a TV and personal computer, the
battery life may become shorter.
.
.
Do not change or modify the Intel-
ligent Key.
Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is comple-
tely dry.
For information regarding replacement of a
battery, see “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
.
.
.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
For models with a steering wheel lock mechan-
ism: Because the steering wheel is locked
electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position is
impossible when the vehicle battery is comple-
tely discharged. Pay special attention that the
vehicle battery is not completely discharged.
Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a mag-
netic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computer or
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
1
The operating range
is within 31.50 in (80
*
cm) from each request switch.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone who does not
carry the Intelligent Key to push the request
switch to lock/unlock the doors.
SPA2407
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-
TION
.
Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the In-
telligent Key is outside the vehicle.
SPA1948A
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
.
.
After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.
1
*
operating range
from the request switch.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
.
.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing
doors with the door handle request switch)
can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHI-
CLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in
the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner,
audio, phone and voice recognition sys-
tems” section.)
SPA2408
SPA2434
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out from your pocket or bag.
SPA2435
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch with the Intelligent
Key inside the vehicle.
Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent
Key port
A
handle request switch
or the lift gate
*
Power lift gate open (if so equipped)
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
B
request switch
tion.
within the range of opera-
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with
another registered Intelligent Key.
*
C
*
When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift
gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn
(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-
tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator
and horn mode” later in this section.
2. Push the power lift gate opener switch
.
Unlocking doors
3. The lift gate will unlock and automatically
A
1. Push the door handle request switch
or
*
open.
B
*
the lift gate request switch
once while
4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the
outside chime sounds.
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
Locking doors
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and the
outside chime sounds once. The corre-
sponding door or the lift gate will unlock.
To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate
button on the key, or power lift gate switch on
the instrument panel or lower part of the lift gate.
(See “LIFT GATE” in the “3. Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section.)
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position, push the ignition switch to the OFF
position and make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you.*1
3. Push the request switch again within 1
minute.
2. Close all the doors.*2
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and the
outside chime sounds once again. All the
doors and the lift gate will unlock.
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.
A
3. Push the door handle request switch
or
*
B
*
lift gate request switch
while carrying
the Intelligent Key with you.*3
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch while
the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time
period, the request switch is pushed, all doors
will be locked automatically after another 1
minute.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.
1
LOCK
button
is pushed, the hazard
*
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
outside chime sounds twice.
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
2
*
When the UNLOCK
the hazard indicator flashes once.
button
is pushed,
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
If horns are not necessary, the system can be
switched to the hazard indicator mode.
.
.
Opening any door
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key
while any door is open.
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
Pushing the ignition switch
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
twice. When the UNLOCK
button is
Hazard indicator and horn mode:
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
horn operates.
DOOR LOCK
HAZARD - twice
DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD - once
Intelligent Key system
OUTSIDE CHIME - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - once
(Using door handle or lift gate request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - once
HORN - none
HAZARD - twice
HORN - once
(Using
or
button)
Hazard indicator mode:
DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK
Intelligent Key system
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
(Using door handle or lift gate request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
(Using
or
button)
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
Switching procedure:
When all the following conditions are met for 60
minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the
power supply to prevent battery discharge.
1
Push the LOCK
*
2
and UNLOCK
*
buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds
to switch the mode from one to the other.
.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position,
and
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3
times.
.
.
All doors are closed, and
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator
flashes once and the horn chirps once.
The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the
Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or
to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,
chime or beep sounds inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning displays in the dot matrix
liquid crystal display.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
displays, be sure to check the vehicle and
Intelligent Key.
See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in
this section and “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYS-
TAL DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
Possible cause
Action to take
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
and the inside warning chime sounds con-
tinuously.
When pushing the ignition switch
to stop the engine
The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)
position. position.
When shifting the selector lever
to the P (Park) position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
position.
tion.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
tion.
When opening the driver’s door
to get out of the vehicle
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent
Key port.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
gent Key port.
The NO KEY warning appears on the display,
the outside chime sounds 3 times and the
inside warning chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
position. tion.
When closing the door after get-
ting out of the vehicle
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position and the selector lever is not in position and push the ignition switch to the
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
and the outside chime sounds continuously.
the P (Park) position.
OFF position.
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the request switch
or the LOCK
button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
Intelligent Key to lock the door
A door is not closed securely.
Close the door securely.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
discharged.
WARNING
After locking with the remote keyless entry
function, pull the door handle to make sure the
doors are securely locked.
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pushed.
The FAA advises that radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and commu-
nication systems. Do not operate the
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not operated
unintentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.
The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies
depending on the environment. To securely
operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach
the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, activate
the panic alarm and open the windows and lift
gate (if so equipped) by pushing the buttons on
the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle.
SPA2252A
Type A
Before locking the doors, make sure the
Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.
The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent
Key can operate at a distance of approximately
33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective
distance depends upon the conditions around
the vehicle.)
The lock and unlock buttons will not operate
when:
.
the distance between the Intelligent Key and
the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).
SPA2436
.
the Intelligent Key battery is completely
Type B
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
LOCK button
*
The door windows can be opened or closed by
turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See
“DOORS” earlier in this section.)
Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK
2
UNLOCK button
Power lift gate button
PANIC button
*
2
button
once.
*
3
(if so equipped)
*
2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
4
*
Opening/closing lift gate (if so equipped)
driver’s door will unlock.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
3
1. Push the power lift gate button
*
3. Push the UNLOCK
1 minute.
button again within
for more than 1 second.
When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift
gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn
(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-
tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator
and horn mode” later in this section.
2. The lift gate will automatically open.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All
the doors and the lift gate will unlock.
The hazard indicator flashes 5 times and the
outside chime sounds for approximately 3
seconds.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the UNLOCK button while
the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time
period, the UNLOCK button is pushed, all doors
will be locked automatically after another 1
minute.
To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate
Locking doors
3
*
button
.
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position and push the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you.*1
The lift gate will automatically close.
3
If the button
is pushed while the lift
*
gate is being opened or closed, the lift gate will
reverse.
.
.
Opening any door
2. Close all the doors and lift gate.*2
Pushing the ignition switch
1
3. Push the LOCK
button
.
*
3
The power lift gate button
cannot be
*
operated when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Opening windows
To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK
4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once.
2
button
for about 3 seconds after the
*
Using panic alarm
door is unlocked.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you can activate the alarm according to the
following procedure to call attention.
*1: Doors will lock while the ignition switch is in
the ACC or ON position.
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK
button.
*2: Doors will not lock while any door is open.
4
*
1. Push the PANIC
button
for more
Windows cannot be closed using the button on
the Intelligent Key.
than 1 second.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. The theft warning alarm will sound and the
headlights will flash for 25 seconds.
Hazard indicator and horn mode:
DOOR LOCK
HAZARD - twice
DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD - once
3. The panic alarm stops under either of the
following conditions.
Intelligent Key system
OUTSIDE CHIME - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - once
(Using door handle or lift gate request switch)
.
.
It has run for 25 seconds, or
Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - once
HORN - none
HAZARD - twice
HORN - once
(Using
or
button)
Any of the buttons is pushed. (Note: the
panic button should be pushed for more
than 1 second.)
Hazard indicator mode:
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.
Intelligent Key system
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
(Using door handle or lift gate request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
1
LOCK
button
is pushed, the hazard
(Using
or
button)
*
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
2
*
When the UNLOCK
the hazard indicator flashes once.
button
is pushed,
If horns are not necessary, the system can be
switched to the hazard indicator mode.
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
twice. When the UNLOCK
button is
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
horn operates.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD
Switching procedure:
1
Push the LOCK
*
2
and UNLOCK
*
buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds
to switch the mode from one to the other.
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3
times.
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator
flashes once and the horn chirps once.
SPA2437
1
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
*
located below the instrument panel; the
hood will then spring up slightly.
WARNING
.
.
Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the
hood to fly open and result in an
accident.
2
2. Pull the lever
up at the front of the hood
*
with your fingertips and raise the hood.
3. When closing the hood, slowly close the
hood down and make sure it locks into
place.
If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIFT GATE
.
inserting the mechanical key into the driver’s
door key cylinder and turning it to the rear of
the vehicle twice.
WARNING
.
.
Always be sure the lift gate has
been closed securely to prevent it
from opening while driving.
To close the lift gate, pull down until it securely
locks.
OPERATING POWER LIFT GATE (if so
equipped)
Do not drive with the lift gate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon mon-
oxide)” in the “5. Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
To operate the power lift gate, the selector lever
must be in the P (Park) position.
The power lift gate will not operate if the battery
voltage is low.
.
.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
SPA2438
OPERATING MANUAL LIFT GATE
To open the lift gate, unlock it and push the
A
opener switch
. Pull up the lift gate to open.
*
Always be sure that hands and feet
are clear of the door frame to avoid
injury while closing the lift gate.
The lift gate can be unlocked by:
.
.
.
.
pushing the unlock button
Intelligent Key twice.
on the
pushing the lift gate request switch (if so
equipped).
pushing the door handle request switch
twice (if so equipped).
pushing the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPA2461
SPA2439
SPA2463
Power lift gate main switch
The power lift gate operation can be turned on
or off by the power lift gate main switch on the
instrument panel.
When the power lift gate main switch is pushed
to the “OFF” position, the power operation is not
available by the power lift gate switch on the lift
gate and lift gate opener switch.
SPA2462
SPA2440
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second
motion will stop and the drive motor will
disengage. The lift gate will enter the manual
mode.
Power open
When the lift gate is fully closed, the lift gate will
fully open automatically by:
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside
chime sounds when the lift gate starts closing.
A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the
lift gate. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch
sensor during power close, the lift gate will
reverse and return to the full open position
immediately.
A
.
pushing the power lift gate switch
the instrument panel
on
*
Reverse function
The power lift gate will reverse immediately if
one of the following actions is performed during
power open or power close.
B
*
.
.
pushing the lift gate opener switch
C
*
pushing the power lift gate button
on
A
.
.
.
pushing the power lift gate switch
the instrument panel
on
NOTE:
the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second
*
If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed,
the power close function will not operate.
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside
chime sounds when the lift gate starts opening.
D
*
pushing the lift gate switch
part of the lift gate
on the lower
NOTE:
WARNING
C
*
pushing the lift gate button
the Intelligent Key.
on
The lift gate can be opened by the power
A
lift gate switch
or the lift gate button
even if the lift gate is locked.
The lift gate will individually unlock and
open. Once the lift gate is closed, its lock
will align to the vehicle’s lock or unlock
status.
There is a small distance immediately
before the closed position that cannot
be detected. Make sure that all passen-
gers keep their hands, etc., clear from
the lift gate opening before closing the
lift gate.
*
C
*
The outside chime sounds when the lift gate
starts to reverse.
C
*
The power lift gate button
Intelligent Key cannot be operated when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
on the
Power close
Manual mode
Auto reverse function
When the lift gate is fully opened, the lift gate
will fully close automatically by:
If power operation is not available, the lift gate
can be operated manually. Power operation may
not be available if multiple obstacles have been
detected in a single power cycle or if the battery
voltage is low. When the power lift gate main
switch is in the OFF position, the lift gate can be
opened manually by pushing the lift gate opener
switch. If the power lift gate opener switch is
The auto-reverse function enables the lift gate to
automatically reverse when something is caught
in the lift gate as it is opening or closing. When
the control unit detects an obstacle, the lift gate
will reverse and return to the full open or full
close position.
A
*
.
.
.
pushing the power lift gate switch
the instrument panel
on
on
on
D
*
pushing the power lift gate switch
the lower part of the lift gate
If a second obstacle is detected, the lift gate
C
*
pushing the lift gate release button
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pushed during power open or close, the power
operation will be canceled and the lift gate can
be operated manually.
CAUTION
.
.
If the power lift gate does not stay
open or if the lift gate unexpectedly
closes at any time, do not operate
the lift gate. There may be a pres-
sure loss in one or both of the lift
gate gas stays. Have the lift gate
inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
Do not activate the power lift gate if
one or both of the lift gate gas stays
are removed. Damage to the lift
gate or power lift gate mechanisms
may occur.
SPA2464
Safe Mode
1
If the gas stays of the lift gate
lose pressure,
AUTO CLOSURE
*
the power lift gate safe mode is activated. When
the safe mode is activated, the lift gate
intermittently closes. Then the lift gate will be
pulled to the closed and latched position by a
motor.
If the lift gate is pulled down to a partly open
position, the lift gate will pull itself to the closed
position.
Do not apply excessive force when the
auto closure is operating. Excessive force
applied may cause the mechanism to
malfunction.
The power lift gate cannot be opened using the
switches at any time in the safe mode.
Do not operate the lift gate again until it is
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
.
The lift gate will automatically close
from a partly open position. To avoid
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
pinching, keep hands and fingers
away from lift gate opening.
.
Do not let children operate the lift
gate.
SPA1915
SPA2441
LIFT GATE RELEASE
OPENING FUEL-FILLER DOOR
If the lift gate cannot be opened due to a
discharged battery, follow these steps.
To open the fuel-filler door, push the opener
switch located below the instrument panel. To
lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.
1. Remove the cover inside of the lift gate with
a suitable tool.
A
*
2. Move the lever toward the direction
illustrated to open the lift gate.
as
Have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
cle.
light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to
.
Do not fill a portable fuel container
in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-
tricity can cause an explosion of
flammable liquid, vapor or gas in
any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death when
filling portable fuel containers:
WARNING
.
Gasoline is extremely flammable
and highly explosive under certain
conditions. You could be burned or
seriously injured if it is misused or
mishandled. Always stop engine
and do not smoke or allow open
flames or sparks near the vehicle
when refueling.
drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the light does not turn
light
off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-
er.
— Always place the container on
the ground when filling.
— Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
.
.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Continued
refueling may cause fuel overflow,
resulting in fuel spray and possibly
a fire.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
— Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It
has a built-in safety valve needed
for proper operation of the fuel
system and emission control sys-
tem. An incorrect cap can result in a
serious malfunction and possible
injury. It could also cause the mal-
function indicator light to come on.
CAUTION
.
.
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid
paint damage.
Insert the cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-
en the fuel-filler cap properly may
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle
body to attempt to start your vehi-
cause the
malfunction indicator
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
WARNING
.
.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You could lose control
of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
any closer to you than is necessary
for proper steering operation and
comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates
with great force. If you are unrest-
rained, leaning forward, sitting side-
ways or out of position in any way,
you are at greater risk of injury or
death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from
the air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far
away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts.
SPA2442
SPA2443
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
MANUAL OPERATION
Tilt or telescopic operation
1
Pull the lock lever
down and adjust the
*
steering wheel forward or rearward to the
desired position.
A
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
*
while refueling.
Push the lock lever up securely to lock the
steering wheel in place.
2
Pull the lock lever
and adjust the steering
*
wheel up or down to the desired position.
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUN VISORS
POSITIONER” later in this section.
SPA2444A
ELECTRIC OPERATION
Tilt or telescopic operation
Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or
down, forward or rearward to the desired
position.
Entry/Exit function operation (if so
equipped):
The automatic drive positioner system will make
the steering wheel move up automatically when
the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver
get into and out of the seat more easily.
SIC3451
For more information, see “AUTOMATIC DRIVE
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIRRORS
CAUTION
.
.
Do not store the main sun visor
before storing the extension sun
visor.
Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
1. To block out glare from the front, swing
1
*
down the main sun visor
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
2
*
swing it to the side
.
SPA2143
SPA2447
3
3. Draw out the extension sun visor
from
*
Manual anti-glare type
INSIDE MIRROR
the main sun visor to block from further
glare.
1
*
The night position
will reduce glare from the
Adjust the height and the angle of the inside
mirror to the desired position.
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2
*
Use the day position
hours.
when driving in daylight
WARNING
Use the night position only when ne-
cessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver opera-
tion, see “HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEI-
VER” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
Automatic anti-glare type
The inside mirror is designed so that it
automatically changes reflection according to
the intensity of the headlights of the following
vehicle.
The anti-glare system will be automatically
turned on when the ignition switch is pushed
to the ON position.
When the anti-glare system is turned on, the
A
indicator light
will illuminate and excessive
*
glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind
you will be reduced.
B
SPA2422A
Type A: Push the
switch
to make the
*
Type A
inside rearview mirror operate normally and the
indicator light will turn off. Push the
again to turn the system on.
switch
C
Type B: Push the “*” switch
*
to make the
inside rearview mirror operate normally. The
indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch
D
*
to turn the system on.
Do not allow any object to cover the
E
sensors
or apply glass cleaner on
*
them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensor, resulting in improper opera-
tion.
For the compass (if so equipped) operation, see
“COMPASS” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.
SPA2450
Type B
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The outside mirror will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Turn the switch right or left to select the right or
1
*
left side mirror
, then adjust using the control
2
switch
.
*
Defrosting outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear
window defroster switch is operated.
SPA2319
SPA1829
Foldable outside mirrors
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the
rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror control switch is located on
the armrest.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system has two
features:
canceled by pressing and holding the SET
switch for more than 10 seconds.
.
.
Entry/exit function
Memory storage
The indicator lights on the memory switches (1
and 2) will blink once when the function is
canceled, and the indicator lights will blink twice
when the function is activated. Note that the
indicator lights may illuminate after 5 seconds
while holding the SET switch. This indicates
readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to a
stored memory position. Keep the SET switch
pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or
off the entry/exit function.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
and steering column will automatically move
when the selector lever is in the P (Park)
position. This allows the driver to get into and
out of the driver’s seat more easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the
steering wheel will move up when the driver’s
door is opened with the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and the Intelligent Key not
inserted in the Intelligent Key port.
The entry/exit function can also be activated or
canceled if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key
or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned
to ON or OFF in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings.
(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SET-
TINGS” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air condi-
tioner, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section.)
SIC2064
VANITY MIRROR
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun
visor and pull up the cover.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return
to the previous positions when the ignition
switch is pushed to the ACC position.
Initialize entry/exit function
The driver’s seat will not return to the previous
positions if the seat or steering adjusting switch
is operated when the seat is at the exit position.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the entry/exit function will not work
though this function was set on before. In such
a case, after connecting the battery or replacing
with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s
door more than two times after the ignition
switch is turned from the ON position to the
LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be
activated.
Cancel or activate entry/exit function
The selector lever must be in the P (Park)
position with the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The entry/exit function can be activated or
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING” earlier in
this section and “OUTSIDE MIRRORS”
earlier in this section.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
then push the button on the Intelligent Key.
The driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside
mirrors will move to the memorized position.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2).
Confirming memory storage
.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position
and push the SET switch. If the main
memory has not been stored, the indicator
light will come on for approximately 0.5
second. When the memory has stored in
position, the indicator light will stay on for
approximately 5 seconds.
The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will stay on for approximately 5
seconds after pushing the switch.
If memory is stored in the same memory
switch, the previous memory will be deleted.
Linking Intelligent Key to a stored mem-
ory position
The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored
memory position with the following procedure.
.
.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In
this case, reset the desired position using
the previous procedure.
SPA2445
MEMORY STORAGE
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering
column and outside mirrors can be stored in the
automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these
procedures to use the memory system.
1. Follow one of the steps for storing a memory
position.
If optional keys are added to your vehicle,
the memory storage procedure to switch 1
or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to
a stored memory position should be per-
formed again for each Intelligent Key. For
additional Intelligent Key information, see
“KEYS” earlier in this section.
.
.
While the indicator light for the memory
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
onds, push the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF position,
and then push the SET switch. Push the
button while pushing the memory
button while the indicator light stays on for
approximately 5 seconds.
Selecting the memorized position
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column and
outside mirrors to the desired positions by
manually operating each adjusting switch.
For additional information, see “SEATS” in
the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section and
2. Use one of the following methods to move
the driver’s seat, the outside mirrors and the
steering wheel.
If the indicator light blinks, the Intelligent Key is
linked to that memory setting.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Push the ignition switch to the ON
position and push the memory switch
(1 or 2).
.
.
When the engine is started while moving the
automatic drive positioner.
When the selector lever is moved from the P
(Park) position to any other position. (How-
ever, it will not be canceled while the seat
and steering column are returning to the
previous positions (entry/exit function).)
Within 45 seconds of opening the
driver’s door, push the memory switch
(1 or 2).
The driver’s seat, steering column and
outside mirrors will move to the memorized
position with the indicator light flashing, and
then the light will stay on for approximately 5
seconds.
.
When the driver’s door remains open for
more than 45 seconds and the ignition
switch is not in the ON position.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:
.
.
.
When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h) (entry/exit function).
When the vehicle is driven (memory sto-
rage).
When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat and steering column is turned on while
the automatic drive positioner is operating.
.
.
When the seat, steering column and outside
mirrors have already been moved to the
memorized position.
When no position is stored in the memory
switch.
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems
Safety note....................................................... 4-2
Center multi-function control panel
(models with color display screen) ......................... 4-2
Operating tips ............................................. 4-30
In-cabin microfilter........................................ 4-30
Servicing air conditioner ................................ 4-30
Audio system .................................................. 4-31
How to use multi-function controller ................... 4-4
How to use touch screen
Start-up screen (models with navigation system) ... 4-6
Start menu (models with navigation system) ......... 4-6
How to select menus on the screen ................... 4-7
Vehicle information and settings............................. 4-8
How to use STATUS button.............................. 4-8
changer ..................................................... 4-39
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
changer ..................................................... 4-44
CompactFlash (CF) player operation
(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-49
iPod® player operation (if so equipped).............. 4-51
How to use brightness control and display ON/
OFF button................................................... 4-8
“MUSIC BOX” hard-disk drive
(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-52
How to use INFO button.................................. 4-8
How to use SETTING button .......................... 4-12
Rearview monitor (if so equipped) ........................ 4-19
How to read the displayed lines....................... 4-20
How to park with predicted course lines............ 4-20
CD/CF (CompactFlash) care and cleaning ......... 4-59
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio ........ 4-61
Antenna ..................................................... 4-62
NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System (MES)
(if so equipped) ............................................... 4-63
Difference between predicted and actual
distances ................................................... 4-22
DVD player operation precautions .................... 4-63
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) system
components................................................ 4-64
Remote controller and headphones battery
replacement................................................ 4-68
Before operating the DVD entertainment
system....................................................... 4-68
How to adjust the screen............................... 4-24
Operating tips ............................................. 4-24
Ventilators ...................................................... 4-25
Heater and air conditioner .................................. 4-26
Automatic operation...................................... 4-28
Manual operation ......................................... 4-29
Playing a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) ............... 4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system ON/OFF ........................... 4-30
Care and maintenance .................................. 4-73
Car phone or CB radio...................................... 4-74
Getting started ............................................ 4-88
Choosing a language .................................... 4-88
Pairing procedure......................................... 4-88
Making a call by entering a phone number ......... 4-89
Receiving a call ........................................... 4-89
List of voice commands ................................. 4-90
Call........................................................... 4-90
Phone book ................................................ 4-92
Memo pad.................................................. 4-94
Setup........................................................ 4-94
Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ....................... 4-96
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-98
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
navigation system............................................. 4-75
Control buttons ........................................... 4-77
Pairing procedure......................................... 4-77
Phonebook registration.................................. 4-78
Making a call............................................... 4-80
Receiving a call ........................................... 4-81
During a call ............................................... 4-81
Phone setting.............................................. 4-82
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-84
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(models with navigation system) .......................... 4-99
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
navigation system (if so equipped) ....................... 4-85
NISSAN voice recognition standard mode.......... 4-99
Using the system ....................................... 4-102
Regulatory information................................... 4-86
Initialization ................................................. 4-86
Operating tips ............................................. 4-86
Giving voice commands................................. 4-86
Control buttons ........................................... 4-88
NISSAN voice recognition alternate command
mode ...................................................... 4-109
Using the system ....................................... 4-115
Troubleshooting guide ................................. 4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION
CONTROL PANEL (models with
color display screen)
SAFETY NOTE
WARNING
.
.
Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in
accident, fire or electric shock.
.
.
In case you notice any foreign
object in the system hardware, spill
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell
coming from it, stop using the
system immediately and contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-
ing such conditions may lead to
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
SAA1845
With navigation system
1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-8)
2, 6, 7, 8, 9.
For navigation system control buttons (Refer to the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)
3. Multi-function controller (P.4-4)
4. “PHONE” Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
Park the vehicle in a safe location
and apply the parking brake to view
the images on the front center dis-
play screen using devices connected
to the auxiliary input jacks.
tem button (P.4-75)
5.
“
OFF” brightness control and display ON/
OFF button (P.4-8)
10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information button
(P.4-8)
11. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)
Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme temperature conditions [below
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these condi-
tions may result in system malfunctions.
4-2 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA1846
SAA1847
Without navigation system
With navigation system
1. “INFO” vehicle information button (P.4-8)
2. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-8)
3. Multi-function controller (P.4-4)
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
4.
“
OFF” brightness control and display ON/
OFF button (P.4-8)
5. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)
SAA1848
Without navigation system
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
ately with soap and water.
.
To clean the display, use a soft, dry
cloth. If additional cleaning is ne-
cessary, use a small amount of
neutral detergent with a soft cloth.
Never use a rough cloth, alcohol,
benzine, thinner or any kind of
solvent or paper towel with a che-
mical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
Choose an item on the display using the main
2
directional buttons
(or additional directional
*
6
*
buttons
with navigation system) or center
, and push the ENTER button
3
1
dial
for
*
*
operation.
4
If you push the BACK button
before the
*
setup is completed, the setup will be canceled
and/or the display will return to the previous
screen. This button can also be used to delete
characters that have been input.
.
Do not splash any liquid such as
water or car fragrance on the dis-
play. Contact with liquid will cause
the system to malfunction.
After the setup is completed, push the BACK
SAA1542
4
*
button
and return to the previous screen.
Touch screen operation
5
For the VOICE button
functions, refer to the
*
To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot
be operated while driving.
With this system, the same operations as those
for the multi-function controller are possible
using the touch screen operation.
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN
(models with navigation system)
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Selecting the item:
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.
Touch an item to select. When you select the
CAUTION
1
*
“Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area
the screen.
on
.
The glass screen on the liquid
crystal display may break if it is hit
with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass breaks, do not touch the liquid
crystalline material, which contains
a small amount of mercury. In case
of contact with skin, wash immedi-
2
*
Touch the BACK
previous screen.
button to return the
4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Space:
Inserts a space.
Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been
input with one touch. Push and hold the
button to delete all of the characters.
.
OK:
Completes character inputs.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or
detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe
the screen.
SAA1543
SAA1617
Adjusting the item:
Inputting characters:
1
2
*
1
*
Touch the +
settings.
or −
button to adjust the
Touch the letter or number
.
*
There are some options available when inputting
3
4
Touch the UP
or DOWN
button to
characters.
*
*
move to the previous or next page.
.
.
.
Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
Symbols:
Shows symbols such as the question mark
(?).
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA1454
SAA1860
SAA1591
Available items
START-UP SCREEN (models with navi-
gation system)
START MENU (models with navigation
system)
Destination/Route:
When you push the ignition switch to the ACC
or ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warn-
ing is displayed on the screen. When you read
and agree with the warning, push the ENTER
button.
The start menu can be displayed using the
ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted
controls.
These items are for the navigation system. If your
vehicle is equipped with the navigation system,
see the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual for details.
1. While the map (if so equipped) or status
screen is displayed, push and hold the
ENTER switch until the “Menu Options”
screen appears.
Information:
If you do not push the ENTER button, you will
not be able to use the NAVI system.
Displays the information screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the INFO
button.
To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
2. Highlight the preferred item tilting the
ENTER switch up or down, and then push
the ENTER switch.
Settings:
Displays the settings screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the SET-
4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TING button.
2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen. (i.e. Auto Interior Illumination,
etc.)
3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:
Shows that the multi-function controller may
be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen
and select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections
available for that screen (i.e. 1/9).
SAA1510
5. Footer/Information Line:
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high-
lighted. (i.e.
ing doors.)
Cabin lighting when unlock-
Vehicle functions are viewed on the display
screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is
made or menu item is highlighted, different areas
on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen. (i.e. push SETTING button >
choose “Comfort & Conv.” menu item.)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND
SETTINGS
The information shown on the screen should be
a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
See the following for details.
HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON
To display the status of the audio, climate control
system, fuel consumption and navigation system
(if so equipped), push the STATUS button. The
following information will appear when the
STATUS button is pushed.
Audio ? Audio and Climate control system ?
Audio and fuel consumption ? Audio and
Navigation system (if so equipped) ? Audio
HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-
TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
Push the “
OFF” button to switch the
SAA1545
display brightness to the daytime mode or the
nighttime mode, and to adjust the display
brightness using the multi-function controller
while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
With navigation system
The display brightness can also be adjusted
using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-
ness DOWN button (−).
Push and hold the “
OFF” button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the
button again to turn the display on.
HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
The display screen shows vehicle and navigation
(if so equipped) information for your conveni-
ence.
SAA1511
Without navigation system
4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle information display
Fuel Economy information
1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.
The distance to empty, average fuel economy
and current fuel economy (shown on the right
side bar) will be displayed for reference.
The screens as illustrated will appear.
2. Choose an item using the multi-function
controller and push the ENTER button.
To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use the
multi-function controller to highlight the “Reset”
key and push the ENTER button.
3. After viewing or adjusting the information on
the following screens, push the BACK
button to return to the INFORMATION
menu.
If the “View” key is highlighted with the multi-
function controller and the ENTER button is
pushed, the average fuel consumption history
will be displayed in graph form along with the
average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.
For the items “Traffic Info.”, “Where am I?”,
“GPS Satellite Info.” and “Navigation Version”,
refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual.
SAA1546
The unit can be converted between “US” and
“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING
BUTTON” later in this section.)
The fuel economy information may differ from the
information displayed on the dot matrix liquid
crystal display. This is due to the timing
difference in updating the information and does
not indicate a malfunction.
SAA1547
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance information display cannot be
operated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place to see the information.
The unit can be converted between “US” and
“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING
BUTTON” later in this section.)
SAA1554
SAA1555
1. Reset the driving distance to the new
maintenance schedule.
Maintenance information
To set the maintenance interval for Reminders 1
to 4, choose an item using the multi-function
controller and push the ENTER button.
2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance
schedule. To determine the recommended
maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
You can also set to display a message to remind
you that the maintenance needs to be per-
formed.
3. To display the reminder automatically when
the set trip distance is reached, highlight the
“Interval Reminder” key with the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER
button.
The following example shows how to set
Reminder 1. Use the same steps to set the
other maintenance information.
4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE
INFO., push the BACK button.
4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the ON position until one of the following
conditions is met:
.
.
.
“Reset Distance” is selected.
“Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.
the maintenance interval is set again.
SAA1611
SAA1592
The Reminder will be automatically displayed as
shown when both of the following conditions are
met:
Voice Recognition information (models
with navigation system)
When you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition
system for the first time or if you do not know
how to operate it, you can display the voice
command list or user guide for confirmation.
(See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-
TEM (models with navigation system)” later in
this section for the details.)
.
the vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK
position.
.
the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or
ON position the next time you drive the
vehicle after the set value has been reached.
Command List:
To return to the previous display after the
“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed,
push the BACK button.
Displays a list of voice commands that the
system can recognize.
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is dis-
played each time the ignition switch is pushed to
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON
User Guide:
The display as illustrated will appear when the
SETTING button is pushed.
Displays a simplified operation manual of the
voice recognition system and how to use the
voice commands.
For navigation settings, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
To show the “Comfort & Conv.” item, push the
ignition switch to the ON position.
SAA1556
With navigation system
SAA1514
Without navigation system
4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Sensitive Vol.:
Sound volume is increased according to the
vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from OFF
(0) to 5.
SAA1557
SAA1813
With navigation system
Audio settings
Display settings
The above display will appear when pushing the
SETTING button, selecting the “Audio” key
with the multi-function controller and pushing
the ENTER button.
The above display will appear when pushing the
SETTING button, selecting “Display” key with
the multi-function controller and pushing the
ENTER button.
Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:
Display:
To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound
balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Bal-
ance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with the
multi-function controller.
To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button
and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other
method is to push and hold the “
button for more than 2 seconds.
OFF”
These items can also be adjusted by pushing
and turning the AUDIO knob.
When any mode button is pushed with the
screen off, the screen turns on for further
operation. The screen will turn off automatically
5 seconds after the operation is finished.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON
position, or push the “ OFF” button.
using the remote controller. (See “NISSAN
MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (MES)”
later in this section.)
Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast”
key and push the ENTER button.
Then, you can adjust the brightness to “Darker”
or “Brighter”, and the contrast to “Lower” or
“Higher” using the multi-function controller.
For information on the “Background Color”
key, refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
SAA1814
Navigation settings (models with navi-
gation system)
For the details of “Navigation” settings, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.
Rear Display settings (if so equipped)
The above display will appear when pushing the
SETTING button, selecting the “Rear Display”
key with the multi-function controller and push-
ing the ENTER button.
Rear Display:
To open the rear display, push the ENTER
button. The rear display is flipped down auto-
matically. To close the rear display, push the
ENTER button and turn the “OK” indicator off.
The rear display will be closed automatically
when the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position.
The rear display can be also opened or closed
4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume and Beeps settings (models with
navigation system)
The Volume and Beeps settings display will
appear when pushing the SETTING button,
selecting the “Volume and Beeps” key with
the multi-function controller and pushing the
ENTER button.
Guidance Vol.:
To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or
softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust
it with the multi-function controller.
You can also adjust the guidance voice volume
by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice
guidance is being announced.
SAA1612
SAA1561
Beeps settings (models without naviga-
tion system)
Guidance Voice:
The Beeps settings display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Beeps” key with the multi-function controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear
voice guidance in the navigation (if so equipped)
operation or in other operations.
Ringer Vol./Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:
Button Beeps:
For the details of these items, see “BLUE-
TOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this
section.
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a
beep sound when you use a button.
Phone settings (if so equipped)
Button Beeps:
For the details of “Phone” settings, see “BLUE-
TOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this
section.
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a
beep sound when you use a button.
SAA1562
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock Adjust (if so equipped):
Clock Format:
Adjust the hour and the minute by entering the
number.
Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the
24-hour clock display.
Offset Adjust (if so equipped):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per
minute.
Daylight Saving Time:
Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time
application.
Time Zone:
SAA2001
Choose the time zone from the following
Clock settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Pacific
The Clock settings display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Clock” key with the multi-function controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
Mountain
Central
Eastern
Atlantic
On-screen Clock:
When this item is turned to ON, a clock is
always displayed in the upper right corner of the
screen.
Newfoundland
Hawaii
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS
system for models with navigation system.
Alaska
4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
formed again within 60 seconds.
Comfort & Conv. settings
The Comfort & Conv. settings display will appear
when pushing the SETTING button, selecting
the “Comfort & Conv.” key with the multi-
function controller and pushing the ENTER
button. This key does not appear on the display
until the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position.
When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors
will be unlocked after the door unlock operation
is performed once.
Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:
When this item is turned to ON, door lock/
unlock function by pushing the door handle
request switch will be activated.
Auto Interior Illumination:
Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so
equipped):
When this item is turned to ON, the interior
lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.
When this item is turned to ON, the steering
wheel moves upward for easy exit if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s
door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and
pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,
the steering wheel moves to the previous
position.
Auto Headlights Sensitivity (if so
equipped):
SAA1564
Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights
higher (right) or lower (left).
Auto Headlights Off Delay (if so equipped):
Choose the duration of the automatic headlight
off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and
180 second periods.
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so
equipped):
When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat
moves backward for easy exit if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s
door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and
pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,
the driver’s seat moves to the previous position.
Selective Door Unlock:
When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s
door is unlocked first after the door unlock
operation. When the door handle request switch
on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding
door is unlocked first. All the doors can be
unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-
SAA1565
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Return All Settings to Default:
Language/Units:
Select this item, push the ENTER button and
choose “YES” if you want to return all settings to
the default.
.
Select Language
Choose the “Select Language” key and
push the ENTER button. Select “English” or
“Franc¸ais” for your favorite display appear-
ance.
If you select the “Franc¸ais” key, the French
language will be displayed, so please use
the French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a
French Owner’s Manual, see “OWNER’S
MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER IN-
FORMATION” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section.
SAA1566
.
Select Units
Others settings (models with navigation
system)
The Others settings display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Others” key with the multi-function controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
Choose the “Select Units” key and push
the ENTER button. Select “US” (Mile, 8F,
MPG) or “Metric” (km, 8C, L/100 km) for
your favorite display appearance.
Voice Recognition:
For the details of this item, see “NISSAN VOICE
RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with naviga-
tion system)” later in this section.
4-18 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
When the selector lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows
the view to the rear of the vehicle.
Select Units:
Choose the “Select Units” key and push the
ENTER button. From the following display,
select “US” (Mile, 8F, MPG) or “Metric” (km,
8C, L/100 km) for your favorite display appear-
ance.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
WARNING
.
.
The rear view camera is a conve-
nience but it is not a substitute for
proper backing up. Always turn and
check that it is safe to do so before
backing up. Always back up slowly.
SAA1092
Language/Units settings (models without
navigation system)
The Language/Units settings display will appear
when pushing the SETTING button, selecting
the “Language/Units” key with the multi-
function controller and pushing the ENTER
button.
Objects viewed in the RearView
Monitor differ from actual distance
because a wide-angle lens is used.
Objects in the RearView Monitor
will appear visually opposite than
when viewed in the rear view and
outside mirrors.
Select Language:
Choose the “Select Language” key and push
the ENTER button. From the following display,
select “English”, “Franc¸ais” or “Espanol” for your
.
.
Make sure that the lift gate is
securely closed when backing up.
˜
favorite display appearance.
Underneath the bumper and the
corner areas of the bumper cannot
be viewed on the RearView Monitor
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Vehicle width guide lines
:
*
because of its monitoring range
limitation.
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
.
.
Do not put anything on the rear view
camera. The rear view camera is
installed above the license plate.
6
Predicted course lines
:
*
Indicate the predicted course when backing up.
The predicted course lines will be displayed on
the monitor when the selector lever is in the R
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is
turned. The predicted course lines will move
depending on how much the steering wheel is
turned and will not be displayed while the
steering wheel is in the neutral position.
When washing the vehicle with
high-pressure water, be sure not to
spray it around the camera. Other-
wise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on
the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
electric shock.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
.
Do not strike the camera. It is a
precision instrument. Otherwise, it
may malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric
shock.
SAA1896
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
WARNING
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
.
.
Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
A
vehicle body line
monitor.
are displayed on the
*
CAUTION
Use the displayed lines as a refer-
ence. The lines are highly affected
by the number of occupants, fuel
level, vehicle position, road condi-
tion and road grade.
Distance guide lines:
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1
.
.
.
.
Red line
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
*
*
3
*
2
Yellow line
Green line
Green line
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
.
If the tires are replaced with differ-
ent sized tires, the predicted course
line may be displayed incorrectly.
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
: approx. 10 ft (3 m)
4
*
4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the
actual course line.
different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
.
When backing-up the vehicle up a
hill objects viewed in the monitor
are further than they appear. When
backing-up the vehicle down a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are
closer than they appear. Use the
inside mirror or glance over your
shoulder to properly judge dis-
tances to other objects.
If the battery is disconnected or
becomes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed in-
correctly. If this occurs, please per-
form the following procedures:
— Turn the steering wheel from
lock to lock while the engine is
running.
— Drive the vehicle on a straight
road for more than 5 minutes.
The vehicle width and predicted course
lines are wider than the actual width and
course.
.
.
.
When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
The displayed lines will appear
slightly off to the right because the
rear view camera is not installed in
the rear center of the vehicle.
SAA1897
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe
before parking your vehicle.
The distance guide line and the
vehicle width line should be used
as a reference only when the vehicle
is on a level paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is
for reference only and may be
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
A
*
the screen
when the selector lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the selector lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface.
The distance viewed on the monitor is for
reference only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.
SAA1898
SAA1978
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted course
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to
A
B
*
C
*
lines
enter the parking space
.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
D
vehicle width guide lines
parallel to the
*
the place
distance on the hill is the place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)
*
C
*
parking space
while referring to the
B
. Note that
*
predicted course lines.
4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor
further than it appears.
any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor
closer than it appears.
SAA1979
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown further than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to
A
the place
distance on the hill is the place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)
*
B
*
. Note that
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
course.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,
Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor, push the SETTING button with the
RearView Monitor on, select the item key and
adjust the level using the multi-function con-
troller.
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,
Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied and the
engine is not running.
OPERATING TIPS
.
When the selector lever is shifted to the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-
matically changes to the RearView Monitor
mode. However, the radio can be heard.
.
It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor or the normal screen is displayed
after the selector lever has been shifted to R
from another position or to another position
from R. Objects may be distorted momenta-
rily until the RearView Monitor screen is
displayed completely.
SAA1923
SAA1980
Backing up near a projecting object
Backing up behind a projecting object
A
C
The predicted course lines
do not touch the
The position
is shown further than the
*
*
B
position
*
object in the display. However, the vehicle may
hit the object if it projects over the actual
backing up course.
in the display. However, the
is actually at the same distance
as the position
object when backing up to the position
C
position
*
A
. The vehicle may hit the
*
.
When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display
objects. This is not a malfunction.
A
*
if
the object projects over the actual backing up
4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VENTILATORS
.
.
When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
This is not a malfunction.
water.
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
.
.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from those of
the actual object.
.
.
.
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night. This is not a
malfunction.
SAA1991
Center ventilators
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-
play objects. Clean the camera.
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
.
.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
Do not use wax on the camera window.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with mild detergent diluted with
SAA1990
Side ventilators
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
WARNING
.
.
The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
SAA1520
SAA1066
Rear (if so equipped)
For the models with the color display screen,
push the “STATUS” button to display the heater
and air conditioner status screen. (See “HOW
TO USE STATUS BUTTON” earlier in this
section.)
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction
of ventilators.
.
Do not use the recirculation mode
for long periods as it may cause the
interior air to become stale and the
windows to fog up.
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are
closed.
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are
open.
Start the engine and operate the heater and air
conditioner system.
You can individually set the driver and front
passenger side temperature using each tem-
perature control button.
4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2040
Type A
1. Temperature control button (driver side)
2. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON button
3.
4.
5.
“
“
“
” front defroster button
” fan speed control dial/OFF button
” intake air control button
6. “MODE” manual air flow control button
7. Temperature control button (passenger side)
8. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button
9.
“
” rear window defroster button (See “REAR
WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-
TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.)
10. “
” upper vent system button
11. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust the temperature to about 758F
(248C) for normal operation.
.
The temperature of the passenger com-
partment will be maintained automati-
cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed
will also be controlled automatically.
3. You can individually set driver and front
passenger side temperature using each
temperature control button (type A) or dial
(type B). When the “DUAL” button is pushed
or the passenger side temperature control
buttons (type A) or dial (type B) is/are
operated, the DUAL indicator will come on.
To turn off the passenger side temperature
control, push the “DUAL” button.
SAA2834
Type B
1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON button/
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
Temperature control dial (driver side)
2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round. The
system works automatically to control the inside
temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed
after the preferred temperature is set manually.
3.
4.
5.
“
“
“
” intake air control button
” fan speed control dial/ON/OFF button
” upper vent system button
Heating (A/C OFF)
6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/Temperature
control dial (passenger side)
The air conditioner does not activate in this
mode. When you need to heat only, use this
mode.
7.
8.
“
“
” front defroster button
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator
on the button will illuminate and AUTO will
be displayed.)
” rear window defroster button (See “REAR
WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-
TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.)
1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator
will turn off.)
2. Operate the driver side temperature control
buttons (type A) or dial (type B) to set the
desired temperature.
2. Operate the temperature control buttons
(type A) or dial (type B) to set the desired
temperature.
9. “MODE” manual air flow control button
4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also
controlled automatically.
compartment to improve the defogging
performance.
about 2 seconds. The indicator lights will flash
twice, and then the intake air will be controlled
automatically.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Air flow control
Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control
button selects the air outlet to:
.
.
Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise the
system may not work properly.
Turn the “
” fan speed control dial to
manually control the fan speed.
:
Air flows from center and side ventila-
tors.
Not recommended if windows fog up.
Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Push the “
:
Air flows from center and side ventila-
tors and foot outlets.
Air recirculation
” front defroster button. (The
indicator light on the button will come on.)
Push the intake air control button “
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light “ ” will come on.
” to
:
:
Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
2. Operate the temperature control buttons
(type A) dial (type B) to set the desired
temperature.
Air flows from defroster and foot out-
lets.
The air recirculation mode cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
Upper vent system
When the “
the air flow against the driver’s or passenger’s
upper body becomes gentle. The indicator light
on the button will come on.
.
.
.
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control
dial and set it to the maximum position.
mode “
”.
” upper vent button is pushed,
Outside air circulation
Push the intake air control button “
” to
As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to
the auto mode.
change the air circulation from the intake air to
In this mode, air from the center ventilators flows
both straight and upward in order to control the
cabin temperature without blowing air directly
on the occupants.
the outside air. The indicator light “
off.
” will turn
When the “
” front defroster button is
pushed, the air conditioner will automatically
be turned on at outside temperatures above
238F (−58C) to defog the windshield, and
the air recirculate mode will automatically be
turned off.
Automatic air intake control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually control
the intake air, push the intake air control button
If you want strong air flow against your upper
body, push the “
indicator light off.
” button to turn the
“
”. To return to the automatic control mode,
push the intake air control button “ ” for
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO TURN THE SYSTEM ON/OFF
The filter should be replaced if air flow is
extremely decreased or when windows fog
up easily when operating heater or air
conditioning system.
Push the “OFF” or “ON·OFF” button when the
heater and air conditioner is off. The system will
turn on with the settings that were used
immediately before the system was turned off.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is
charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind. This refrigerant will not
harm the earth’s ozone layer. However,
special charging equipment and lubricant are
required when servicing your NISSAN air con-
ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-
cants will cause severe damage to your air
conditioning system. (See “CAPACITIES AND
RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information” section
for air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations.)
SAA1989
OPERATING TIPS
A
*
The sunload sensor
on the instrument panel
helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not
put anything on or around this sensor.
Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
environmentally friendly air conditioning system.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The air conditioning system is equipped with an
in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,
defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the
filter in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in the NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
The system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid personal injury,
any air conditioner service should be
done only by an experienced technician
with the proper equipment.
4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO SYSTEM
function in your NISSAN radio system.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Radio
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position and push the “RADIO” button to turn
on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the
engine not running, the ignition switch should be
pushed to the ACC position.
Reception conditions will constantly change
because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other
vehicles can work against ideal reception.
Described below are some of the factors that
can affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the
device in a different location may reduce or
eliminate the noise.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external
influences. Intermittent changes in reception
quality normally are caused by these external
influences.
SAA0306
Using a cellular phone in or near the
vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
FM radio reception:
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30
miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range than
stereo FM. External influences may sometimes
interfere with FM station reception even if the
FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The
strength of the FM signal is directly related to the
distance between the transmitter and receiver.
FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting
many of the same characteristics as light. For
example they will reflect off objects.
Radio reception:
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the
quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These
characteristics are completely normal in a given
reception area, and do not indicate any mal-
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,
usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the
treble setting to reduce the treble response.
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):
When the satellite radio is first installed or the
battery has been replaced, the satellite radio
may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.
Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio
ON for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-
flected signals reach the receiver at the same
time. The signals may cancel each other,
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®
satellite radio service subscription. Satellite
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
AM radio reception:
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite
radio signal.
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics. AM signals are also
subject to interference as they travel from
transmitter to receiver.
If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna
can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
the ice to restore satellite radio reception.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
SAA0480
Compact Disc (CD) player
.
Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
.
Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
changer.
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
The CD can be played when the tem-
perature of the player returns to nor-
mal.
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
.
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion.
UNPLAYABLE:
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
— CDs that are not round
— CDs with a paper label
.
.
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
CompactFlash (CF) player (if so
equipped)
The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. De-
crease the temperature before use.
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or
.
Do not force a CF card into the slot.
This could damage the CF card and/or
player.
have abnormal edges
.
.
This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to
record or burn CDs.
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the CF
card and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
.
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC:
.
.
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
.
The CF player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. De-
crease the temperature before use.
— Confirm that the CD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints,
or that have pin holes may not work
properly.
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or
.
.
Do not expose a CF card to direct
sunlight.
warped and it is free of scratches.
.
The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
PUSH EJECT:
Confirm that a CF card is inserted
correctly.
This is an error due to the temperature
inside the player is too high. Remove
the CD by pushing the EJECT button,
and after a short time reinsert the CD.
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
order as they appear on the iPod®.
the cable and/or connectors are wet. It
may damage the iPod®.
iPod® player (if so equipped)
.
Some characters used in other lan-
guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are
not displayed properly on the vehicle
center screen. We recommend using
English language characters with an
iPod®.
.
.
.
The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may
remain in fast forward or rewind mode
if it is connected during a seek opera-
tion. In this case, please manually reset
the iPod®.
.
.
If the cable and connectors are ex-
posed to water, allow the cable and/or
connectors to dry completely before
connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait
24 hours for it to dry).
If you are using an iPod® (3rd Genera-
tion with Dock connector), do not use
very long names for the song title,
album name or artist name to avoid
the iPod® from resetting itself.
.
.
Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in the iPod®. The vehicle
center display may momentarily black
out, but it will soon recover.
If the connector is exposed to fluids
other than water, evaporative residue
may cause a short between the con-
nector pins. In this case, replace the
cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®
and a loss of function may occur.
If the iPod® automatically selects large
video podcast files while in the shuffle
mode, the vehicle center display may
momentarily black out, but it will soon
recover.
Be careful not to do the following, or
the cable could be damaged and a loss
of function may occur.
.
.
If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,
connectors cracked, contamination
such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the
connectors), do not use the cable and
contact a NISSAN dealer to replace the
cable with a new one.
— Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40
mm) radius minimum).
.
.
Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
— Twist the cable excessively (more
than 180 degrees).
When not in use for extended periods
of time, store the cable in a clean, dust
free environment at room temperature
and without direct sun exposure.
— Pull or drop the cable.
The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast forward or rewind if it
is disconnected during a seek opera-
tion.
— Close the center console lid on the
cable or connectors.
— Store objects with sharp edges in the
.
.
Do not use the cable for any other
purposes other than its intended use in
the vehicle.
storage where the cable is stored.
.
.
An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
— Spill liquids on the cable and con-
iPod® charging is only possible for
devices that support charging via a
FireWire® connection. Devices that can
nectors.
.
Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if
Audiobooks may not play in the same
4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be charged by the iPod player include:
size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:
44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually
no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 com-
pression removes the redundant and irrele-
vant parts of a sound signal that the human
ear doesn’t hear.
.
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
— iPod® Classic - 1st through 6th gen-
eration
— iPod® Mini - 1st and 2nd generation
— iPod® Nano - 1st through 3rd genera-
.
.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
tion only
*
Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.
— iPod® Touch - first generation only
— iPhone® - first generation only
* The iPod® Classic and iPod® Touch may
not charge properly in some cases.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.
* 12V charging is not possible on the
iPhone 3G and later models.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
* iPod® and FireWire® are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash (CF)
with MP3 or WMA
.
.
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
Explanation of terms:
.
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.
SAA1025
Playback order:
Music playback order of the CD/CF with MP3 or
WMA is as illustrated above.
.
The folder names of folders not containing
MP3/WMA files are not shown in the
display.
4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF
CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not
supported.
Supported file systems
CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
MP3
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Supported
versions*1
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA*2 Sampling frequency
Bit rate
32 kHz - 48 kHz
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
With navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Without navigation system:
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
With navigation system: 128 characters
Without navigation system: 64 characters
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*3
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM
Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before
using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data)
will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes
and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before the music
starts playing.
If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required
before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,
might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate files
Move immediately to the next song when playing.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is
prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the
desired order.
The songs do not play back in the desired order.
4-38 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK
14. AUX jack
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC
(CD) CHANGER
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The radio has an FM diversity reception system,
which employs two antennas printed on the rear
window. This system automatically switches to
the antenna which is receiving less interference.
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the ON·OFF/VOLUME
control knob while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing
immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF/
VOLUME control knob turns the system off.
SAA2010
1. CD EJECT button
7. DISC button
2. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob
3. Radio station and CD selector buttons
4. CD LOAD button
8. AUX button
9. DISP (display) change/CLOCK button
10. Radio/CD SCAN (tuning) button
Turn the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob to
adjust the volume.
5. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selector / AUDIO
control knob
11. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button
12. REW (rewind) button for SEEK/TRACK
6. AM·FM band select button
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting sound quality:
AM-FM radio operation
SEEK tuning:
Push the Audio control knob to change the
selecting mode as follows.
radio (FM/AM) band select:
Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button
or
to tune from low to high or high to low
frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting
station.
Bass ? Treble ? Fade ? Balance ? Beep
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
Rotate the Audio control knob to adjust Bass,
Treble, Fade and Balance to the desired level.
Fade adjusts the sound level between the front
and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the
sound between the right and left speakers.
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
SCAN tuning:
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the station last
played.
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stops at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the
button again during this 5 seconds period will
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station.
To turn the beep sound off or on, rotate the
Audio control knob until the desired mode is
displayed. This turns on or off the beep sound
when audio buttons are pushed.
The last station/channel played will also come
on when the ON·OFF/VOL control knob is
pushed to ON.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, push the Audio control knob
repeatedly until the radio or CD display re-
appears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear after about 5 seconds.
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is turned to ON, the audio
source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will come on.
1
6
*
to
Station memory operations:
*
Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM
band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can
be set for the AM band.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
CLOCK adjust:
Push the CLOCK adjust button for more than
1.5 seconds to turn on the CLOCK display.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the radio band select button.
TUNE (Tuning):
See “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section for the detailed clock adjust-
ment operation.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual tuning.
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,
SCAN or TUNE button.
3. Select the desired station/channel and keep
pushing any of the desired station preset
4-40 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
6
buttons
to
until a beep sound is
*
*
CD LOAD:
CD PLAY INFORMATION:
heard. (The radio mutes when the select
button is pushed.)
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the
LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
the loading position by pushing the CD insert
When the DISP button is pushed for less than
1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the
disc information display will change as follows:
4. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
1
6
*
select button
to
, then insert the CD.
*
CD:
To insert
6
CDs to the CD changer in
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
succession, push the LOAD button for more
than 1.5 seconds.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the
display.
CD with MP3 or WMA:
Compact Disc (CD) changer operation
PLAY:
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, push the LOAD button and insert the
compact disc into the slot with the label side
facing up. The compact disc will be guided
automatically into the slot and start playing.
When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with
the system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will
start to play.
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-
gram Search) FF, APS REW:
When the DISC button is pushed with the
compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
the disc and the play time will appear on the
display.
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the compact disc is being played, the
compact disc will play while fast forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the
compact disc will return to normal play speed.
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the compact disc will play.
If the system has been turned off while the
compact disc was playing, pushing the
ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the com-
pact disc.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is
being played, the next track or the beginning of
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the current track on the CD will be played.
To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for
more than 1.5 seconds.
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computers.
CD PLAY selection:
When this button is pushed while the compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will come
out and the system will turn off.
Push the AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
To change to another CD already loaded into the
1
*
player, push the CD play select buttons
to
6
.
*
If the compact disc comes out and is not
removed, it will be pulled back into the slot
to protect it.
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
When the RPT button is pushed while the
compact disc is played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
SCAN tuning:
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the beginning of all the tracks of CDs will
be played for 10 seconds in sequence.
(CD)
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the first program in all the CDs will be
played for 10 seconds.
(CD with MP3 or WMA)
Pushing the button again during this 10 second
period will stop SCAN tuning.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within
10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
disc program.
CD EJECT:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
To eject the discs selected by the CD select
button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5
seconds.
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
4-42 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No satellite radio reception is available unless
optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XM® satellite radio service
subscription is active.
SAA1850
7. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button
1. CD EJECT button
2. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob
3. Radio station and CD selector buttons
4. CD LOAD button (if so equipped)
8. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for
SEEK/TRACK
9. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK
10. CompactFlash (CF) card slot (models with navi-
gation system)
5. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selector / AUDIO
control knob
6. Radio SCAN (tuning) button
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) CHANGER
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®
satellite radio service subscription. The satellite
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
It may take some time to receive the activation
signal after subscribing to the XM® satellite
radio. After receiving the activation signal, an
available channel list will be automatically
updated in the radio. For XM®, push the ignition
switch from LOCK to ACC to update the
channel list.
SAA1851
SAA1852
With navigation system
1. AM·FM band select button
Without navigation system
1. AM·FM band select button
2. SAT button
2. DISC button
3. DISC·AUX button
3. AUX/SAT band select button
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The radio has an FM diversity reception system,
which employs two antennas printed on the rear
window. This system automatically switches to
the antenna which is receiving less interference.
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
4-44 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
displays as follows:
pushed to ON.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
CD ? CompactFlash* ? DVD* ? AUX ?
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®
satellite radio service subscription. Satellite
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the ON·OFF/VOLUME
control knob while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing
immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF/
VOLUME control knob turns the system off.
iPod®* ? Music Box* ? CD
*: if so equipped
AM-FM-SAT radio operation
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is turned to ON, the audio
source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will come on.
radio (FM/AM) band select:
Turn the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob to
adjust the volume.
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-
ance:
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
TUNE (Tuning):
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push
the Audio control knob. When the display shows
the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,
Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control
knob to set the desired setting. For the other
setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SETTING
BUTTON” earlier in this section.
or
radio (SAT) band select:
.
For AM and FM radio
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual
tuning.
(With navigation system)
SAT1 ? SAT2 ? SAT1
.
For XM satellite radio
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seek
channels from all of the categories when
any CAT is not selected.
This vehicle has some sound effect functions as
follows (if so equipped):
(Without navigation system)
AUX ? SAT1 ? SAT2 ? AUX
.
Speed Sensitive Volume
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the station last
played.
SEEK tuning/CATEGORY
(CAT):
For more details, see “VEHICLE INFORMATION
AND SETTINGS” earlier in this section.
Switching the display (for models with
navigation system):
.
For AM and FM radio
The last station/channel played will also come
on when the ON·OFF/VOL control knob is
Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button
Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch the
or
to tune from low to high or high to
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
tuned to that station.
Text:
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
When the “Text” key is selected with the multi-
function controller on the display and then the
ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio
is being played, the text information will be
displayed on the screen.
.
For XM satellite radio
Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button
or
to tune to the first channel of the
1
*
6
*
to
Station memory operations:
next or previous category.
Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM
band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and the SAT radio
(6 for SAT1, 6 for SAT2), and 6 stations can be
set for the AM band.
.
.
.
.
.
CH Name
Category
Name
During satellite radio reception, the following
notices will be displayed under certain condi-
tions.
.
NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the
SAT tuner is connected.)
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
select button.
Title
Other
.
.
OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,
SCAN or TUNE button.
Compact Disc (CD) player/changer op-
eration
ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connection
error)
3. Select the desired station/channel and keep
pushing any of the desired station preset
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, push the LOAD button (if so equipped)
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
label side facing up. The compact disc will be
guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.
.
.
.
LOADING (When the initial setting is
performed)
1
6
buttons
to
until a beep sound is
*
*
heard. (The radio mutes when the select
button is pushed.)
UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-
scription is not active)
4. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.)
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
the disc and the play time will appear on the
display.
SCAN tuning:
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stops at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the
button again during this 5 seconds period will
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the compact disc will play.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
If the system has been turned off while the
compact disc was playing, pushing the
4-46 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the com-
pact disc.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
Text:
than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is
being played, the next track or the beginning of
the current track on the CD will be played.
When the “Text” key is selected in the screen
using the multi-function controller and then the
ENTER button is pushed while the CD is being
played, the music information below will be
displayed on the screen.
CD LOAD (if so equipped):
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when a CD is being played.
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the
LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
the loading position by pushing the CD insert
CD:
CD PLAY selection (if so equipped):
1
*
6
*
select button
to
, then insert the CD.
To change to another CD already loaded into the
player, push the CD play select buttons
.
.
Disc title
Track title
To insert
6
CDs to the CD changer in
1
to
*
succession, push the LOAD button for more
than 1.5 seconds.
6
or choose a disc displayed on the screen
*
using the multi-function controller.
CD with MP3 or WMA:
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the
display.
.
.
.
.
.
Folder title
File title
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
When the RPT button is pushed while the
compact disc is played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
or
PLAY:
Song title
Album title
Artist
When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with
the system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will
start to play.
(CD)
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-
gram Search) FF, APS REW:
When the DISC button is pushed with the
compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
(CD with MP3 or WMA)
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is
loaded and a medium is played using the
auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and
forth between CD and medium.
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the compact disc is being played, the
compact disc will play while fast forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the
compact disc will return to normal play speed.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the
power of the portable device.
CD EJECT:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
With a compatible device connected to the
jacks, push the AUX button repeatedly until the
display switches to the AUX mode. The output
from the device will be played through the
monitor and audio system.
To eject the discs selected by the CD select
button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5
seconds.
To eject all the discs (if so equipped), push the
EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.
When this button is pushed while the compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will come
out and the system will turn off.
SAA1856
If the compact disc comes out and is not
removed, it will be pulled back into the slot
to protect it.
Auxiliary input jacks
The auxiliary input jacks are located on the rear
side of the center console. NTSC compatible
devices such as video games, camcorders and
portable video players can be connected to the
auxiliary jacks. Compatible audio devices, such
as some MP3 players, can also be connected to
the system through the auxiliary jacks.
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-
tion purposes.
.
.
.
Yellow - video input
White - left channel audio input
Red - right channel audio input
4-48 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLAY:
When the DISC button is pushed with the
system off and the CF card inserted, the system
will turn on.
If another audio source is playing and a CF card
is inserted, push the DISC button repeatedly
until the center display changes to the Com-
pactFlash mode.
Text:
When the “Text” key is selected on the screen
using the multi-function controller and then the
ENTER button is pushed while the CF is being
played, the music information below will be
displayed on the screen.
SAA1567
SAA1862
COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYER OP-
ERATION (models with navigation sys-
tem)
Display Mode:
.
.
.
.
.
Folder title
Song title
Track title
Album Title
Artist
The AUX settings display will appear when the
“Setting” key is selected using the multi-
function controller and pushing the ENTER
button.
Audio main operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
A
*
position, remove the cover
and insert a CF
into the slot. Then, push the
button repeatedly to switch to the Compact-
Flash mode.
Choose the display mode from the following:
B
*
card
.
.
.
Normal
Wide
If the system has been turned off while the
CompactFlash card was playing, pushing the
ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the Com-
pactFlash card.
Cinema
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-
gram Search) FF, APS REW:
CF EJECT:
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
When the knob next to the CF slot is pushed
with the CF card inserted, the CF card will be
ejected.
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the CompactFlash card is being played,
the CompactFlash card will play while fast
forwarding or rewinding. When the button is
released, the CompactFlash card will return to
the normal play speed.
Messages:
The following messages will be displayed under
certain conditions.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
.
.
.
.
.
Reading Compact Flash (The system is
reading the CF card inserted in the slot.)
than 1.5 seconds while the CompactFlash card
is being played, the next track or the beginning
of the current track on the CF will be played.
SAA1853
Type A
No Compact Flash card (A CF card is not
inserted in the slot.)
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the CompactFlash card is
being played.
Compact Flash read error (The system
cannot read a CF card.)
Unplayable file (The system cannot play a
music file.)
Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the Compact-
Flash card, turn the MP3/WMA folder selector
or choose a folder displayed on the screen using
the multi-function controller.
No audio file (The CF card inserted in the
slot or its folder does not contain any music
files.)
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
When the RPT button is pushed while the
CompactFlash card is played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
SAA2011
Type B
4-50 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iPod® PLAYER OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
Open the console lid and connect the cable
as illustrated, and then connect the other end of
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control
knob will start the iPod®.
Compatibility
The following models are available:
.
Third generation iPod® (Firmware version
2.3 or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not
available)
DISC/AUX button:
1
*
When the DISC/AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the iPod® connected, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing
and the iPod® is connected, push the DISC
button repeatedly until the center display
changes to the iPod® mode.
the cable to your iPod®
. Your vehicle is
2
*
.
.
.
Fourth generation iPod® (Firmware version
3.1.1 or later)
equipped with the specialized cable for con-
necting the iPod® to your vehicle audio unit. The
battery of your iPod® is charged while it is
connected to the vehicle if the iPod® supports
charging via a FireWire® connection.
Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version
1.1.2 or later)
5.5 generation iPod® (Firmware version
1.2.3 or later)
Interface:
The display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN
screen when the connection is completed.
While connecting the iPod® to the vehicle, the
iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®
interface. Use the multi-function controller and
the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod®
with your favorite settings.
.
.
.
.
iPod® mini (Firmware version 1.41 or later)
iPod® photo (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later)
iPod® nano (Firmware version 1.2 or later)
To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,
fully depress the center connector button to
unlatch the connector and pull the connector
straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the
cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side
connector buttons and pull the iPod® connector
straight out of the iPod®.
The first generation iPod® classic (Firmware
version 1.0.3 or later)
The following items can be chosen from the
menu list screen. For further information about
each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
The fourth generation iPod® nano, iPod® touch,
the second generation iPod classic and iPhone
3G may not work with the system in some
cases.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Playlists
Artists
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Albums
Songs
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated.
Audio main operation
Podcasts
Genres
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the DISC/AUX button
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“MUSIC BOX” HARD-DISK DRIVE
(models with navigation system)
.
.
Composers
Audiobooks
The “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system
can store songs from CDs being played. The
system has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage
capacity and can record up to 200 hours
(approximately 2,900 songs).
The following touch-panel buttons shown on the
screen are also available:
.
.
: returns to the previous screen.
: plays/pauses the music selected.
The following CDs can be recorded in the
“Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)/APS
(Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW:
.
.
CDs without MP3/WMA files
When the
or
button is pushed for
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding
or rewinding. When the button is released, the
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.
SAA1613
.
.
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) spe-
cification in CD-Extras
Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For
the details of playing CDs, see “Compact
Disc (CD) player/changer operation” earlier
in this section.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
First session of multisession disc
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
next track or the beginning of the current track
on the iPod® will be played.
Extreme temperature conditions [below
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)] could
affect the performance of the hard-disk.
2. Select the “REC” key using the NISSAN
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the iPod® is playing.
NOTE:
controller and push the ENTER button.
If the hard-disk needs to be replaced due
to a malfunction, all stored music data will
be erased.
NOTE:
.
The system starts playing and record-
ing the 1st track on the CD when the
“REC” key is selected.
.
Individual tracks from a CD cannot be
recorded to the “Music Box” hard-disk
drive.
4-52 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
The skip, fast forward and rewind
features are disabled while the CD is
recording.
.
.
There is not enough space in the hard disk
The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.
The recording process can be stopped
at any time. All tracks that were played
before the CD was stopped are stored.
.
The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000.
Automatic recording:
Individual tracks can be deleted from
the hard-disk drive after the CD is
recorded.
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned
to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.
(See “Music Box settings” later in this section.)
Stopping recording:
To stop the recording, select the STOP button
by touching the screen or using the multi-
function controller.
SAA1614
If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard-disk drive or in the
CD, the title is automatically displayed on the
screen. For title acquisition from the hard-disk
drive, music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned
off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position, the recording also stops.
To view the details of the track, select the Text
key by touching the screen or using the multi-
function controller. The track name and album
title are displayed on the screen.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the
mark is displayed
behind the track number.
The “Music Box” hard-disk drive cannot perform
recording under the following conditions.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tion.)
Play mode selection:
To change to another album or artist, turn the
MP3/WMA folder selector.
Stopping playback:
The system stops playing when:
a. another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash or
AUX) is selected.
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
When the RPT button is pushed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
b. the audio system is turned off.
c. the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position.
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-
gram Search) FF, APS REW:
SAA1615
Playing recorded songs
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
Select the “Music Box” hard-disk drive by using
one of the following methods.
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while a track is being played, the track will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the track will return to the
normal play speed.
.
Push the source select switch repeatedly on
the steering wheel until the center display
changes to the “Music Box” mode. (See
“STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON-
TROLS FOR AUDIO” later in this section.)
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played,
the next track or the beginning of the current
track will be played.
.
.
Push the DISC button repeatedly until the
center display changes to the “Music Box”
mode.
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when a track is being played.
Give voice commands. (See “NISSAN
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models
with navigation system)” later in this sec-
4-54 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Play by Category
Plays music from one of the following
categories: My Favorites, Hit Songs, Kids’
Songs and Rarely Played.
Search Artists
Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.
Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks
by the artist and starts playing the first track.
SAA1684
SAA1685
There are some options available during play-
back. Select one of the following that are
displayed on the screen, if necessary.
.
.
Play by Album
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are
sorted in alphabetical order.
Menu:
Play by Date
Refer to the following information for each item.
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are
sorted in order of the date when they were
stored in the system.
.
Play by Artist
Plays songs by an artist whose music is
currently being played. The artists are sorted
in alphabetical order.
.
Play by Mood
Plays music from one of the following
moods: Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow
Music and Upbeat Music.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)
.
Music Box System Info.
Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s and ’10s
and After)
Displays the following information about the
“Music Box” hard-disk drive:
Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist, Group
and Duo)
a. “Music Box” Used / Free Space (Informa-
tion about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track”
and “Remaining Time” is displayed.)
Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip
Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk,
Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New
Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious,
World, Classical, Children’s and Other)
b. Mood Categories (Number of saved
tracks and their categories (Relaxing
Music, Lively Music, Slow Music, Upbeat
Music and Others) are displayed.)
.
.
Search Keywords
c. Deleted Items (Information about the
deleted tracks is displayed.)
Input a search keyword using the keypad
displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO
USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with navi-
gation system)” earlier in this section.)
SAA1686
d. Search Missing Titles
.
Search Albums
If titles are not displayed for CDs that have
been recorded, titles can be acquired using
one of the following methods:
Displays a list of albums in order of the date
when they were stored in the system.
Selecting an album displays all of the tracks
on the album and starts playing the first
track.
Edit Albums
Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,
Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit
the details using the keypad displayed on
the screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH
SCREEN (models with navigation system)”
earlier in this section.)
— Retrieve from HDD
Searches the title using the database in
the hard disk.
Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in
one of the following order: Rec. (Recorded)
Date, Name, Release Year, Artist.
— Retrieve from CF
Searches the title from the information
acquired on the Internet. Visit
www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for de-
tails.
.
Search Song Details
Set the conditions and select the “Start
Song Search” key to search for a desired
song that is stored in the system. The
conditions are as follows:
4-56 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— Transfer Missing Titles to CF
Transfers the information of the album
recorded without titles to a Compact-
Flash card. Visit
SCREEN (models with navigation system)”
earlier in this section.)
The category of the track can also be set to
Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop, Club/
Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues, Country,
Metal, Easy Listening, New Age, Sound-
track, Gospel & Religious, World, Classical,
Children’s and Others.
www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for de-
tails.
e. “Music Box” Settings (See “Music Box
settings” later in this section.)
f. CDDB Version (the version of the built-in
Gracenote Database is displayed.)
.
Remove Track
Reset the mood setting of a track.
Restoring deleted data
Deleted music data can be restored by perform-
ing the following.
SAA1688
Text:
Refer to the following information for each item.
1. Select the “Menu” key and then the “Music
Box System Info.” key on the screen.
2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and then
.
Set Mood
the “Album/Track” key.
Set the mood category of the track to
“Relaxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow
Music” or “Upbeat Music”.
3. Select the “Restore Album/Track” key to
restore the deleted music data.
You can also listen to the beginning of each
track that has been deleted by performing the
following.
.
.
Delete Track
Delete the track being played.
Edit Info.
1. Select the “Menu” key and then the “Music
Box System Info.” key on the screen.
Edit the name of the track being played and
its artist using the keypad displayed on the
screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH
2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and then
the “Play Sample” key.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information (“Gracenote Data”) from online
servers (“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions of this device.
Title Text Priority:
Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc Data
Base) to acquire track information from the
Gracenote Database or set to CD TEXT to
acquire the information from CDs.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Grace-
note Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT
TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACE-
NOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
Delete ALL “Music Box” Data:
Delete all music data stored on the hard disk.
Gracenote
NOTE:
.
The information contained in the
Gracenote Database is not fully guar-
anteed.
SAA1616
.
The service of the Gracenote Database
on the Internet may be stopped without
prior notice for maintenance.
Music Box settings
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your license termi-
nates, you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all
rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-
ware, and the Gracenote Servers, including all
ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you
for any information that you provide. You agree
that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under
this Agreement against you directly in its own
name.
To set the “Music Box” hard-disk drive to your
preferred settings, select the “Menu” key during
playback, “Music Box System Info.” key, and
“Music Box Settings” key with the multi-
function controller, and then push the ENTER
button.
End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Automatic Recording:
Gracenote® MusicID® Terms of Use
When this item is turned to ON, the “Music Box”
hard-disk drive automatically starts recording
when a CD is inserted.
This device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-
ware”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related informa-
tion, including name, artist, track, and title
Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.
4-58 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID
service to count queries without knowing any-
thing about who you are. For more information,
see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote MusicID Service.
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACE-
NOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
Copyright:
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be unin-
terrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its online
services at any time.
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more
information visit www.gracenote.com.
SAA0451
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
C
Inc., copyright * 2000-2007 Gracenote.
CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE AND
C
Gracenote Software, copyright * 2000-2007
CLEANING
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
P a t e n t s: # 5, 98 7, 52 5; #6 , 0 61 , 6 80;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,
#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and
other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and
CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks
of Gracenote.
CD
.
.
.
Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the
surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTI-
CULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRIN-
GEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
CF cards
.
Never touch the terminal portion of the
CompactFlash cards. Do not bend the
cards.
.
Always place the cards in the storage case
when they are not being used.
.
.
Do not place heavy objects on the cards.
Do not store the cards in highly humid
locations.
.
.
Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.
Do not spill any liquids on the cards.
Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner’s
Manual for the details.
SAA1854
SAA1855
With navigation system
1. Source select switch
Without navigation system
2. ENTER (models with navigation system) or tuning
(models without navigation system) switch
3. Volume control switch
4. BACK switch
4-60 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON-
TROLS FOR AUDIO
Next track or the beginning of the current
track
After selecting an MP3 folder using the up and
down switch, push the ENTER switch to
complete the selection.
.
Pushing DOWN “
”/UP “
” longer
ENTER (models with navigation system)
or tuning (models without navigation
system) switch
Push the switch upward or downward to select
a channel, track, CD or folder when they are
listed on the display.
While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS or
Audio setting screen, some audio functions can
also be controlled using the ENTER switch. The
function varies depending on if you push the
switch shorter (less than 1.5 seconds) or longer
(more than 1.5 seconds).
Folder change (When the last folder on a
disc is playing, the next disc will be
selected.)
iPod® (if so equipped)
.
Pushing DOWN “
”/UP “
” shorter
Tune/Track:
RADIO
BACK switch
Previous or next track (Start/Pause or Menu
can be selected when the ENTER button is
pushed.)
Push this switch to go back to the previous
screen or cancel the selection if it is not
completed.
.
Pushing DOWN “
Next or previous preset channel
Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “
Next or previous station
”/UP “
” shorter
” longer
.
Pushing DOWN “
”/UP “
” longer
Volume control switches
Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to
increase or decrease the volume.
Rewind or fast forward search
.
Music Box hard-disk drive audio system (if
so equipped)
CD
SOURCE select switch
.
Pushing DOWN “
”/UP “
” shorter
.
Pushing DOWN “
”/UP “
” shorter
Push the source select switch to change the
mode, Preset A, Preset B, Preset C, “iPod®” (if
so equipped), “Music Box” (if so equipped), CD,
and CompactFlash (if so equipped). If they are
not ready to function, those modes will be
skipped.
Next track or the beginning of the current
track
Next track or the beginning of the current
track
.
Pushing DOWN “
”/UP “
” longer
.
Pushing DOWN “
”/UP “
” longer
Playlist change (When the last playlist is
playing, the next playlist will be selected.)
Disc change (When only one disc is loaded,
the 1st track of the disc will be selected.)
ENTER switch operation:
CD/CF (if so equipped) with MP3/WMA
Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter
You can also use the ENTER switch to select the
items on the usual setting menu screen.
.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANTENNA
— The vehicle enters a garage with
a low ceiling.
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
— The vehicle is covered with a car
cover.
.
Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation. Otherwise,
the antenna rod may break during
vehicle operation.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any
metal parts to it. This may cause
poor reception or noise.
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with
a dampened soft cloth.
SAA2102
Roof antenna (if so equipped)
Removing the antenna:
You can remove the antenna if necessary.
Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by
turning counterclockwise.
CAUTION
.
To avoid damaging or deforming the
antenna, be sure to remove the
antenna under the following condi-
tions.
— The vehicle enters an automatic
car wash.
4-62 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with the mobile
entertainment system, which enables you to
play a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the
images and sounds both in the front and rear
display screens.
of contact with skin, wash immedi-
ately with soap and water.
.
Use a damp, soft cloth when clean-
ing the Mobile Entertainment Sys-
tem components. Do not use
solvents or cleaning solutions.
WARNING
.
.
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
temperature conditions [below −48F
(−208C) or above 1588F (708C)].
.
.
The driver must not attempt to
operate or view the Mobile Enter-
tainment System (MES) while the
vehicle is in motion so that full
attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do
not operate the system more than 15
minutes without starting the engine.
Do not attempt to modify the system
to display a movie on the front
screen while the vehicle is being
driven. Doing so may distract the
driver and may cause a collision and
serious personal injury or death.
Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to
reduce driver distraction. Audio is available
when a movie is played. To view movies in the
front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,
move the selector lever to the P (Park) position
and apply the parking brake.
LHA0484
CAUTION
DVD player operation precautions
.
The glass screen on the liquid
crystal display may break if hit with
a hard or sharp object. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid
crystalline material, which contains
a small amount of mercury. In case
Do not use the following DVD’s as they
may cause the DVD player to malfunction:
.
.
3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
DVD’s with a region code other than
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
“1”. The region code
is displayed in
*
CAUTION
a small symbol printed on the top of
B
the DVD
.
*
.
.
Do not force a DVD into the slot.
This could cause damage the player.
.
.
.
DVD’s that are not round
DVD’s with a paper label
Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.
DVD’s that are warped, scratched, or
have unequal edges
Displays
.
.
Recordable digital video discs (DVD-R)
WARNING
Rewritable digital video discs (DVD-
RW)
Park the vehicle in a safe location and
apply the parking brake to view the
images on the front center display
screen using the DVD drive or other
devices connected to the auxiliary input
jacks (if so equipped).
SAA1863
DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD) SYS-
TEM COMPONENTS
DVD drive
The DVD drive is located inside of the center
console. Insert a DVD into the slot with the label
side facing the front of the vehicle. The DVD will
be guided automatically into the slot.
CAUTION
.
The glass screen on the liquid
crystal display may break if hit with
a hard or sharp object. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid
crystalline material, which contains
a small amount of mercury. In case
of contact with skin, wash immedi-
ately with soap and water.
When ejecting the DVD, push the EJECT button
1
*
.
.
Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning
4-64 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the Mobile Entertainment System
components. Do not use solvents
or cleaning solutions.
CAUTION
Do not touch the display when it is
opening or closing.
.
Be sure to stow the rear display
when it is not used.
SAA2002
Flip-down screen
Use the remote controller to operate the
motorized flip-down rear display screen.
1. Push the REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE
button on the remote controller to open or
close the display.
2. Adjust the display angle by pushing the
DISPLAY TILT button
or
.
The screen can also be opened using the multi-
function controller. See “Rear Display settings”
earlier in this section.
Do not block the range of the wireless remote
controller receiver and wireless headphones
1
*
transmitter
.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
the headphones maybe out of the range of
the transmitter installed in the rear flip-down
display screen. This is not a malfunction, or
the sound may be interrupted temporarily
when there is an obstacle between the
headphones and the transmitter. Remove
the obstacle, such as opaque materials,
hands, hair, etc.
SAA0720
SAA0721
Headphones
Volume control:
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables
are necessary. You can use them in almost all
the ranges in the rear seat for listening to the
sound from DVD or AUX. (It is not possible to
use the headphones in the front seat.)
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the
volume.
The headphones will automatically be turned off
in about 5 minutes if there is no sound during
that period. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, keep the power turned off when not
in use.
Power ON/OFF:
Push the POWER button to turn the head-
phones on or off.
If the sound from the headphones is not clear it
may be because:
.
of an infrared communication device or
cellular phone, turn down the headphone
volume or stop using the headphones, or
4-66 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. AUX button
5. ENTER button
6. DISP button
7. VOLUME CONTROL button
(
or
)
8. Headphones button
9. TRACK/CHANNEL button
(
or
)
10. DISPLAY TILT button
(
or
)
11. BACK button
12. ASPECT button
13. SOUND button
14. Keypad
SAA0978
Remote controller
See “PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC
(DVD)” later in this section for the function of
each buttons.
SAA1861
Remote controller
The remote controller has the following controls:
1. REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE button
2. DVD button
SAA0723
3. Joystick
Headphones
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROLLER AND HEAD-
PHONES BATTERY REPLACEMENT
firm local regulations for battery
disposal.
phones while the vehicle is in motion so
that full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Replace the battery as follows:
1. Open the lid.
.
When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the remote control
and headphones.
CAUTION
2. Replace both batteries with new ones.
FCC Notice:
.
Only operate the DVD while the
vehicle engine is running. Operating
the DVD for extended periods of
time with the engine OFF can dis-
charge the vehicle battery.
.
.
Size AA (remote control)
Size AAA (headphones)
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. This device complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Make sure that the + and 7 ends on
the batteries match the markings in-
side the compartment.
.
.
Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled
liquids may cause the system to
malfunction.
3. Close the lid securely.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, close the lid
securely.
While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
DVD player does not guarantee
complete functionality of all VI-
DEO-CD formats.
.
If you will not be using the remote
control for long periods of time,
remove the batteries.
BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD EN-
TERTAINMENT SYSTEM
.
Replacement of the batteries is
needed when the remote control
only functions at extremely close
distances to the MES or not at all.
Copyright and trademark
Precautions
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-
ment system.
.
The technology protected by the U.S. patent
and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other right
holders is adopted for this system.
.
.
Be careful not to touch the battery
terminal.
WARNING
.
This copyright protected technology cannot
be used without a permit from Macrovision
Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,
The driver must not attempt to operate
the DVD system or wear the head-
An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always con-
4-68 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision
Corporation is not issued.
installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a
region code other than “1” or “ALL”.
.
.
Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.
Display settings
Dolby digital is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
Front display:
To adjust the front display mode, press the
SETTING button while the DVD is being played,
select the “Others” key with the multi-function
controller, and then press the ENTER button.
.
.
Dolby and the double D mark “
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
” are
DTS and DTS Digital Surround “
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
” are
To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,
color, contrast and black level select each key
using the multi-function controller and press the
ENTER button.
Parental level (parental control)
DVDs with the parental control setting can be
played with this system. Please use your own
judgement to set the parental control with the
system.
SAA1829
Then you can adjust each item using the multi-
function controller. After changes have been
made press the BACK button to save the
settings.
PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC
(DVD)
Disc selection
DISC button
You can play the following disc formats with the
DVD drive:
Rear display:
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the DVD
drive while watching the images.
To adjust the rear display mode, push the “DISP”
(Display) button on the remote controller.
.
.
.
DVD-VIDEO
VIDEO-CD
Push the “DISC” button on the instrument panel
to turn the display to the DVD mode.
To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and
contrast, select each key using the joystick on
the remote controller and tilt the joystick to right
or left.
CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD
with MP3/WMA cannot be played.)
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed
automatically.
Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL” or “1
included” for your DVD entertainment system.
(The region code is displayed as a small symbol
printed on the top of the DVD.) This vehicle-
Push the BACK button to apply the settings and
return to the previous display.
The operation screen will be turned on when the
“DISC” button located on the instrument panel
is pushed while a DVD is being played, and it
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will turn off automatically after a period of time.
To turn it on again, push the “DISC” button once
more.
To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to
push the “ ” button on the keypad of the
remote controller.
DVD operation keys
SKIP (FORWARD):
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward.
The chapters will advance the number of times
the ENTER button is pushed.
To operate the DVD drive, select the preferred
key displayed on the operation screen using the
multi-function controller.
PAUSE:
To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible
Select the “
button to pause the DVD. To resume playing the
DVD, use the “PLAY” key.
” key and push the ENTER
to push the “
” button on the keypad of the
remote controller.
SAA2003
To pause the DVD, it is also possible to push the
SKIP (REWIND):
Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-1
“
” button on the keypad of the remote
Select the “
” key and push the ENTER
controller.
button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc back-
ward. The chapters will go back the number of
times the ENTER button is pushed.
PLAY:
Select the “
button to start playing the DVD, for example,
after pausing the DVD.
” key and push the ENTER
To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also
possible to push the “
” button on the
keypad of the remote controller.
To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to
push the “
” button on the keypad of the
remote controller.
STOP:
Select the “
” key and push the ENTER
button to stop playing the DVD.
SAA1831
Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-2
4-70 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD settings
Select the “Settings” key with the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER button
to adjust the following settings.
The items indicated with “*” can also be set from
the rear display. Push the “DVD” button on the
remote controller while a DVD is being played.
Select the preferred item using the joystick
“
” on the remote controller and push the
ENTER “ ” button.
Menu* (DVD-VIDEO):
Some menus specific to each disc will be
shown. For details, see the instructions attached
to the disc.
SAA2013
SAA1194
Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-3
Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-2
Top Menu* (DVD-VIDEO):
Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For
details, see the instructions attached to the disc.
Audio* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD) / Subtitle*
(DVD-VIDEO):
Choose the preferred language using the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER button.
To turn off the subtitle, push and hold the
ENTER button until a beep sounds.
Display Mode* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
“Cinema” mode using the multi-function con-
SAA2014
SAA1195
Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-1
Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-3
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
troller and push the ENTER button again.
Select No.* (VIDEO-CD):
Remote controller operation
Use the remote controller to adjust the following
items.
Select the “Select No.” key and push the
ENTER button to open the number entry screen.
Angle* (DVD-VIDEO):
If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle can be
switched to another one.
Rear display open/close:
Input the number you wish to search for and
select the “OK” key with the multi-function
controller, and then push the ENTER button.
The specified scene will be played.
To open or close the flip-down rear display, push
the “
” button on the remote controller.
Select the “Angle” key and push the ENTER
button. When the “+” side or “−” side is
selected, the angle will change.
Joystick:
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
Use the joystick “
displayed on the rear screen.
” to select the items
DVD menus are automatically configured and
the contents will be played directly when the
“Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some
discs may not be played directly even if this item
is turned on.
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):
When this item is turned on, an angle mark will
be shown on the bottom of the screen if the
scene can be seen from a different angle.
ENTER button:
Push the ENTER “
selected item complete on the rear screen.
” button to make the
10 Key Search* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,
CD-DA):
DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
BACK button:
Select the “DVD Language” key and push the
ENTER button to open the number entry screen.
Select the “10 Key Search” key and push the
ENTER button to open the number entry screen.
Press to go back to the previous screen or
cancel the selection.
Input the number corresponding to the preferred
language and select the “OK” key with the multi-
function controller. Then push the ENTER
button. The DVD top menu language will be
changed to the one specified.
Input the number you want to search for and
select the “OK” key with the multi-function
controller. Then push the ENTER button. The
specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be
played.
Display tilt:
Adjust the display angle by pushing the “DIS-
PLAY TILT” button
or
.
DVD mode:
DRC (DVD-VIDEO):
Title Search* (DVD-VIDEO):
To select the DVD mode, push the DVD button.
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you
to tune the dynamic range of the sound
recorded in the Dolby Digital format.
The scene with the specified title will be
displayed the number of times the “+” side or
“−” side is selected.
AUX mode:
To select the AUX (Auxiliary input jacks) mode,
push the AUX button.
4-72 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume:
Track/Channel:
.
.
Avoid touching or scratching the
monitor screen as it may become
dirty or damaged.
To control the volume level, push the “VOL”
button
Press to skip to the previous or next DVD scene
selection.
or
.
Do not attempt to operate the
system in extreme temperature con-
ditions [below −48F (−208C) and
above 1588F (708C)].
Display:
Keypad:
Press to adjust the rear display screen bright-
ness, tint, contrast, etc.
: PLAY/PAUSE button
: STOP button
.
Do not attempt to operate the
system in extreme humidity condi-
tions (less than 10% or more than
75%).
Aspect:
: FORWARD button
: REWIND button
To change the display size, push the “ASPECT”
button. Each time the button is pushed, the
display size will change to “Cinema”, “Wide”,
“Full” or “Normal”.
: FORWARD button for still images (for
DVD-AUDIO)
Sound:
: REWIND button for still images (for DVD-
AUDIO)
To change the language, push the “SOUND”
button. Each time the button is pushed, the
language will change to each language stored in
the DVD.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean
the surfaces of your Mobile Entertainment
System. (DVD player face, screen, remote
controller, etc.)
Headphones:
The DVD sound can be heard through the
headphones.
CAUTION
Push the “
” button. Each time the button is
pushed the mode will switch to ON or OFF.
.
.
Do not use any solvents or cleaning
solutions when cleaning the video
system.
To control the volume of sound from the
headphones, use the VOLUME CONTROL
knob attached to the headphones.
Do not use excessive force on the
monitor screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
cautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the electronic control modules
and electronic control system harness.
.
.
A new disc may be rough on its
inner and outer edges. Remove the
rough edges using the side of a pen
or pencil as illustrated.
Never attempt to use a DVD that has
been cracked, deformed, or repaired
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment.
WARNING
.
.
A cellular telephone should not be
used while driving so full attention
may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use
of cellular telephones while driving.
.
Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contam-
ination or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not
be read properly.
.
.
.
.
Do not write, draw or attach anything on any
side of the DVD.
If you must make a call while your
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free
cellular phone operational mode (if
so equipped) is highly recom-
mended. Exercise extreme caution
at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
SAA0451
How to handle the DVD
Do not store the DVD in locations with direct
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.
CAUTION
Always place discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
.
.
Handle a DVD by its edges. Never
touch the surface of the disc.
Do not put on any sticker or write anything
on either surface of the DVD.
.
If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface
from the center to the outer edge
using a clean, soft cloth. Do not
wipe the disc using a circular mo-
tion.
.
Do not use a conventional record
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol
intended for industrial use.
4-74 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
procedure is required anymore. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position with the registered
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
Keep the antenna as far away as
possible from the electronic control
modules.
.
.
Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Keep the antenna wire more than 8
in (20 cm) away from the electronic
control system harness. Do not
route the antenna wire next to any
harness.
If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
while talking on the phone, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-
ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone
number using your voice is possible. For more
details, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later
in this section; page 4-99.
.
Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the man-
ufacturer.
.
.
Connect the ground wire from the
CB radio chassis to the body.
CAUTION
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
For details, consult a NISSAN deal-
er.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
.
.
Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner
of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phone, you can set up the wireless connection
between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless tech-
nology, you can make or receive a telephone call
with your cellular phone in your pocket.
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list.
.
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-
vehicle phone module, no phone connecting
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone
service area.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, behind a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
.
.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
1) this device may not cause interference and
2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device
IC Regulatory information
— Your cellular phone is locked in order not
to be dialed.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone pairing procedure
specific to your phone, battery charging,
cellular phone antenna, etc.
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
.
.
.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
.
.
.
The antenna display on the monitor will not
coincide with the antenna display of some
cellular phones.
Immediately after the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position, it may be
impossible to receive a call for a short
period of time.
—
This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as
well as to minimize its echoes.
Bluetooth trademark:
BLUETOOTH® is
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the in-
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection dis-
ruption.
If reception between callers is unclear,
adjusting the incoming or outgoing call
volume may improve the clarity.
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
VOICE COMMANDS
.
.
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual.
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
—
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
seems to be malfunctioning, please visit
For more details, see “NISSAN VOICE RE-
COGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation
4-76 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
system)” later in this section; page 4-99.
SAA1895
button,
PAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Push the PHONE button or the
and select the “Pair phone” key on the
display using the multi-function controller.
Then push the ENTER button.
SAA1857
CONTROL BUTTONS
1) PHONE button
2) TALK/PHONE SEND button
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA1572
SAA1925
SAA1574
2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the
name list of the phones, and push the
ENTER button.
3. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the Bluetooth® cellular phone to
enter the PIN code.
PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION
Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the
phonebook.
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone. See
the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for the
details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on pairing NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones.
1. Push the SETTING button, and select the
“PHONE” key on the display using the multi-
function controller. Then push the ENTER
button.
2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and push the
ENTER button.
3. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the
name list of the phonebook, and push the
ENTER button.
When the pairing is completed, the screen
will return to the Bluetooth® setup display.
4-78 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
To confirm the stored voicetags, select
the “Voicetag Directory” key using the
multi-function controller, and push the
ENTER button.
There are different methods to input a
phone number. Select one of the follow-
ing options instead of “Transfer via
Bluetooth” in step 4 above.
— Enter Data by Keypad
Input the name and phone number manually
using the keypad displayed on the screen.
(See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN
(models with navigation system)” earlier in
this section.)
SAA1575
SAA1576
4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key, and
push the ENTER button in order to register
your cellular phone memory in the phone-
book.
6. After the memory is registered in the phone-
book, the system will ask if you want to add
a voicetag for it. If you want to add a
voicetag, select the “YES” key on the “Add a
voicetag?” screen. For example, if the
partner’s name is David, speak “David” after
a tone. The “David” voicetag is stored in the
phonebook. Voicetags allow easy dialing
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-
tem. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation system)”
later in this section; page 4-99.)
— Copy from Downloaded Phonebook
Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth®
cellular phone. The availability of this func-
tion depends on each cellular phone. The
copying procedure from the cellular phone
also varies according to each cellular phone.
See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more
details.
5. Operate the cellular phone to send a
person’s name and phone number from the
memory of the cellular phone. The memory
sending procedure from the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone
manufacturer. See the cellular phone Own-
er’s Manual for more details.
— Copy from Outgoing Call Logs
Store the name and phone number from the
outgoing call list.
7. When the phonebook registration is com-
pleted, the screen will return to the name list
of the phonebook.
— Copy from Incoming Call Logs
Store the name and phone number from the
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
incoming call list.
4. After the call is over, perform one of the
following to finish the call.
— Delete
a. Select the “Hang up” key and push the
Delete a contact that is registered in the
phonebook.
ENTER button.
b. Push the
wheel.
button on the steering
c. Push the PHONE button on the instru-
ment panel.
There are different methods to make a call.
Select one of the following options instead of
“Call (Phonebook)” in step 2 above.
.
Redial
SAA1895
Dial the previously dialed number again.
Call (Call Logs)
MAKING A CALL
.
To make a call, follow the procedures below.
Select the name or phone number from the
incoming or outgoing call logs.
1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel or the
wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on
the display.
button on the steering
.
.
Call (Downloaded)
Select the name or phone number from the
downloaded call list.
2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the
“PHONE” menu, and push the ENTER
button.
Dial (Keypad)
Input the phone number manually using the
keypad displayed on the screen. (See
“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models
with navigation system)” earlier in this
section.)
3. Select the registered person’s name from
the list, and push the ENTER button. Dialing
will start and the screen will change to the
call-in-progress screen.
4-80 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
Answer
Accept an incoming call to talk.
On Hold
Put an incoming call on hold.
Reject Call
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, perform one of the
following procedures listed below.
a) Select the “Hang up” key on the display and
push the ENTER button.
SAA1578
SAA1579
b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
RECEIVING A CALL
DURING A CALL
c) Push the
button on the steering wheel.
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to the incoming call mode. To receive a
call, perform one of the following procedures
listed below.
There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the
screen if necessary.
.
.
.
Hang up
a) Select the “Answer” key on the display and
Finish the call.
push the ENTER button.
Use Handset
b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
Mute
c) Push the
button on the steering wheel.
There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.
Mute your voice to the person.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Keypad
Send a dial tone to the caller for using
network services such as voice mail.
Cancel Mute
This will appear after “Mute” is selected.
Mute will be canceled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −)
on the steering wheel or turn the volume control
knob on the instrument panel while talking on
the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
SAA1580
SAA1581
Downloaded Phonebook
PHONE SETTING
Refer to the following information for each item.
To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, push the
SETTING button on the instrument panel and
select the “PHONE” key on the display, and then
push the ENTER button.
.
Download All
Download all of the contacts registered in
the Bluetooth® cellular phone. Availability of
this function depends on each cellular
phone. The memory downloading procedure
from the cellular phone also varies according
to each cellular phone. See cellular phone
Owner’s Manual for more details.
Phonebook
See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in
this section for adding, editing and deleting a
contact.
.
Delete Downloaded Phonebook
Delete a downloaded phonebook.
4-82 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-
book
.
.
Pair Phone
.
.
Remove Paired Phone
See “PAIRING PROCEDURE” later in this
section.
Delete a registered cellular phone from the
paired list.
Delete an entry from the downloaded
phonebook.
Priority Change
Paired Phone List
Automatic Hold
If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be
placed on hold automatically after several rings.
Use this command to change the priority
level of the active phone.
Up to 5 registered cellular phones are
shown on the list. If you select a cellular
phone that is different from the one currently
being connected, the newly selected phone
will be connected to the system.
The priority level determines which phone
will be connected to the system when more
than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the
vehicle.
Use Vehicle Ringtone
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is
different from the cellular phone’s will sound
when receiving a call.
.
Edit Phone Name
The system states the priority level of the
active phone and asks for a new priority level
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5).
Rename the registered cellular phones using
the keypad displayed on the screen. (See
“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models
with navigation system)” earlier in this
section.)
Delete Call Logs
Delete all of the incoming or outgoing call logs
from the list.
If the new priority level is already being used
for another phone, the two phones will swap
priority levels.
Bluetooth Setup
See the following information for each item.
For example, if the current priority levels are:
Priority Level 1 = Phone A
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone C
and you change the priority level of Phone C
to Level 1, then:
.
Bluetooth
If this setting is turned off, the connection
between the cellular phone and the in-
vehicle phone module will be canceled.
Priority Level 1 = Phone C
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone A
.
Bluetooth Info
Check information about the device name,
device PIN and connection status.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in
this section; page 4-99.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
System fails to interpret the command
correctly.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to
use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in this
section.)
The system consistently selects the
wrong voicetag.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-84 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
procedure is required anymore. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position with the registered
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, behind a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
WARNING
.
.
Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
— Your cellular phone is locked in order not
to be dialed.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
.
.
.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
while talking on the phone, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-
ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone
number using your voice is possible.
Immediately after the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position, it may be
impossible to receive a call for a short
period of time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
CAUTION
.
.
Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the in-
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection dis-
ruption.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner
of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phone, you can set up the wireless connection
between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless tech-
nology, you can make or receive a telephone call
with your cellular phone in your pocket.
.
.
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list.
.
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
seems to be malfunctioning, please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone
service area.
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-
vehicle phone module, no phone connecting
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATING TIPS
.
.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
1) this device may not cause interference and
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-
ing:
2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
IC Regulatory information
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone pairing procedure
specific to your phone, battery charging,
cellular phone antenna, etc.
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
.
.
.
The antenna display on the monitor will not
coincide with the antenna display of some
cellular phones.
.
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
—
This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as
well as to minimize its echoes.
.
.
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
Bluetooth trademark:
BLUETOOTH® is
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
If reception between callers is unclear,
adjusting the incoming or outgoing call
volume may improve the clarity.
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A.
GIVING VOICE COMMANDS
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push
and release the
button located on the
INITIALIZATION
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pushed before the initialization com-
pletes, the system will announce “Hands-free
phone system not ready” and will not react to
voice commands.
—
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given when
the command is accepted.
.
If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
4-86 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in
a clear voice.
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands.
Refer to the rules and examples below.
—“six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is waiting
for a response.
.
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
—“six two zero zero”
—“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
.
You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at
anytime in any position of the phone number.
(Available only when using the “Call Inter-
national” command.)
You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the voice recognition
(VR) session. You can also push the
button on the steering wheel at any time.
Whenever the VR session is canceled, a
double beep is played to indicate you have
exited the system.
—“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
.
Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
—“One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
Example: 1-800-662-6200
NOTE:
—“One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
.
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switches
(+ or −) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
—NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred, and
—NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred.
NOTE:
.
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continuing
entering digits, if desired.
The voice command “Help” is available at
any time. Please say “Help” to obtain the
information about how to use the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
—“One eight zero zero”
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHONE END
1. Push the
button on the steering wheel.
The system announces the available com-
mands.
Push the
or end a call.
button to cancel a VR session
A
2. Say: “Setup”
. The system acknowl-
*
GETTING STARTED
edges the command and announces the
next set of available commands.
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For
additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
B
3. Say: “Pair phone”
. The system acknowl-
*
edges the command and announces the
next set of available commands.
C
*
4. Say: “New phone”
. The system ac-
CHOOSING A LANGUAGE
You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
knowledges the command and asks you to
initiate pairing from the phone handset
D
*
.
SAA1858
When you are asked to enter a Pass Key for
pairing your Bluetooth® cellular phone,
operate it to enter the code “1234”.
See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” earlier
in this section to change the language.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
The code is always “1234” regardless of the
number of phones paired.
PAIRING PROCEDURE
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone. See
the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for
details. You can also visit
TALK/PHONE SEND
Push the
button to initiate a VR session
or answer an incoming call.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on pairing NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
You can also use the
button to skip
through system feedback and to enter
commands during a call. (See “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section
and “DURING A CALL” earlier in this section
for more information.)
5. The system asks you to say a name for the
E
*
phone
.
If the name is too long or too short, the
4-88 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
RECEIVING A CALL
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
2. Say: “Call”
. The system acknowledges
*
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
When you hear the ringtone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Also, if more than one phone is paired and
the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
B
*
Say: “Call International”
than 10 digits using any special characters.
to dial more
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
3. Say the number you wish to call, starting
with the area code in the single digit format
NOTE:
6. The system asks you to assign a priority level
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ringtone, press the
the steering wheel to reject the call.
F
C
*
. The priority level determines which
. For better recognition results, it is
*
button on
phone is active when more than one paired
Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle. Follow
the instructions provided by the system or
see “SETUP” later in this section for more
information on changing priorities.
recommended to say the numbers in small
groups like, the 3-digits area code, the next
3 digits, then the last 4 digits. For example,
555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”
(1st group), “one two one” (2nd group) and
“three three five four” (3rd group). (See
“How to say numbers” earlier in this section
for more information.)
For additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
7. The system will ask if you would like to
G
select a custom ringtone
. Follow the
*
instructions provided by the system or see
“SETUP” later in this section for more
information on selecting ringtones.
4. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and
announces the available commands.
MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING A
PHONE NUMBER
D
5. Say: “Dial”
. The system acknowledges
*
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
1. Push the
button on steering wheel. A
tone will sound.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
system will end the VR session. Whenever the
VR session is canceled, a double beep is played
to indicate you have exited the system.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime
the system is waiting for a response.
When you get used to the menus in the system,
you can talk ahead by saying more than one
command at a time. For example, say, “Call five
five five one two one two” or “Memo pad
record.”
Also, when you get used to the system
responses, you can skip ahead to the tone by
SAA1926
SAA1927
pressing the
However, if you press the
button on the steering wheel.
button when the
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
When you push and release the
CALL
system is waiting for a response from you it will
end the VR session.
button on
<Name> (speak name)
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the
commands in each sub-menu.
If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
See “PHONE BOOK” later in this section to
learn how to store entries.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry (voicetag) you wish to call.
The system acknowledges the name.
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands
currently available any time the system is waiting
for a response.
If there are multiple locations associated with
the name, the system asks you to choose the
location.
If you want to end an action without completing
it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time
while the system is waiting for a response. The
4-90 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you have confirmed the name and
location, the system begins the call.
and ends the VR session.
numbers. The system then ends the VR
session and returns to the call.
International
<Number> (speak digits)
.
“Transfer Call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, please say “Call International”.
When the system acknowledges the command,
the system will prompt you to speak the number.
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. (See “How to say numbers”
earlier in this section and “MAKING A CALL BY
ENTERING A PHONE NUMBER” earlier in this
section for more details.)
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
“Redial”
available. Press the
button on the steering
You can also issue the Transfer Call
command again to return to a hands-free
call through the vehicle.
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed within the vehicle.
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter
commands.
NOTE:
.
“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
.
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
The system will not redial the last number
dialed by the handset keypad.
.
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
NOTE:
.
.
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
If the other party ends the call or the
cellular phone network connection is lost
while the Mute feature is on, the Mute
feature may need to be reset to “off.”
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers during a call.
For example, if you were directed to dial an
extension by an automated system:
“Callback”
Use the Call Back command to dial the number
of the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing. If a call
back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back”
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When prompted by the system, say the name
you would like to give the new entry (voicetag).
the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-
nication link.
For example, say: “Mary.”
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
The system repeats the number and prompts
you for the next command. When you have
finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”
Once the system accepts the name and you
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a
location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).
The system confirms the name, location and
number. The system then asks if you would like
to store another location for the same name. If
you do not wish to store another location, the
system ends the VR session.
For example, say: “Home.”
SAA1928
The system acknowledges the location.
PHONE BOOK
The system will ask you to say a phone number
or to transfer a phone number stored in the
cellular phone’s memory.
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each
phone paired with the system. Each name can
have up to 4 locations/phone numbers asso-
ciated with it.
“Edit”
Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone
book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone
number to an existing entry.
To enter a phone number by voice command:
NOTE:
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information.)
Each phone has its own separate phone
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the entry you wish to edit.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory (if so equipped):
The system acknowledges the name and asks
you for the location you would like to edit.
“New Entry”
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the
transfer from the phone handset. The new
contact phone number will be transferred from
Say the name of the location.
Use the New Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
The system acknowledges the location.
4-92 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system will ask you to say a phone number
or to transfer a phone number stored in the
cellular phone’s memory.
“Delete”
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
Use the Delete command to erase one entry
from the phone book, all entries from the phone
book, the current redial number or the current
call back number.
To enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information.)
To delete entries from the phone book, say a
name or “All entries” when prompted by the
system.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory (if so equipped):
The system acknowledges the command and
asks you to confirm the deletion.
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the
transfer from the phone handset. The new
contact phone number will be transferred from
the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-
nication link.
To delete the current redial number or call back
number, say “redial number” or “call back
number” when prompted by the system.
If a redial number or a call back number exists,
the system deletes them without asking for
confirmation.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
If there is no number for the entry you are trying
to delete, the system says so and ends the VR
session.
“List Names”
The system repeats the number and prompts
you for the next command. When you have
finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete the
system ends the VR session.
The system confirms the name, location and
number, then announces that the entry has been
stored. The system then ends the VR session.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speak the information you wish to record clearly.
When you are done, press the
button on the steering wheel.
or
A tone sounds and the system announces
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end
the VR session.
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you
wish to record over the oldest memo.
“Delete”
The Delete command erases all memos. The
system asks you to confirm this action before
deleting all memos.
SAA1929
SAA1930
MEMO PAD
SETUP
The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice
memos, each up to 20 seconds long.
Use the Setup command to change options
associated with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System.
“Play”
“Pair Phone”
The system plays back all the memos in the
order of newest to oldest. The system ends the
VR session.
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If there are no memos recorded, the system
announces “No messages to play.” The system
ends the VR session.
When you are asked to enter a PIN code for
pairing your Bluetooth® cellular phone, operate it
to enter the code “1234”.
“Record”
The code is always “1234” regardless of the
number of phones paired.
The system announces “Recording” and a tone
sounds signaling you to begin.
4-94 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a
sixth phone, the system announces that you
must first delete one phone or replace an
existing phone.
“Select Phone”
For example, if the current priority levels are:
Use the Select Phone command to select a
phone of lesser priority when two or more
phones paired with Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System are in the vehicle at the same
time.
Priority Level 1 = Phone A
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone C
If you try to pair a phone that has already been
paired to your vehicle’s system, the system
announces the name the phone is already using.
The pairing procedure will then be canceled.
and you change the priority level of Phone C to
Level 1, then:
The system asks you to name the phone and
confirm the selection.
Priority Level 1 = Phone C
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone A
When prompted by the system, choose from the
following commands:
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected
phone remains active until the ignition switch is
pushed to the LOCK position or you select a
new phone.
“Delete Phone”
.
“New phone” — see “PAIRING PROCE-
DURE” earlier in this section.
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
.
“Replace phone” — The system announces
the names of the phones already paired and
asks which you would like to replace.
“Change Priority”
Use the Change Priority command to change
the priority level of the active phone.
The system announces the names of the phones
already paired with the system and their priority
level. The system then gives you the option to
delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to
the list again.
Once you say the name of the phone you
wish to replace, the paring procedure will
begin. (See “PAIRING PROCEDURE” ear-
lier in this section.)
The priority level determines which phone is
active when more than one paired Bluetooth®
phone is in the vehicle.
The system states the priority level of the active
phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3,
4, 5).
Once you choose to delete a phone or all
phones, the system asks you to confirm this
action.
.
“List phone” — See the description below.
“List Phones”
Use the List Phone command to hear the names
of the phones currently paired. If no phones are
paired, the system announces, “No paired
phones to list.” The system then ends the VR
session.
If the new priority level is already being used for
another phone, the two phones will swap priority
levels.
NOTE:
When you delete a phone, the associated
phone book for that phone will also be
deleted.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Select Ring tone”
memory locations are in use, the system will ask
the user to select which memory location should
be overwritten.
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
Use the Select Ring tone command to select the
tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call
is received.
10. The system will ask you to say your name.
Follow the instructions to register your
name.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
The system announces the name of the active
phone and asks you to choose from the
following commands:
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
11. The system will announce that speaker
adaptation has been completed and the
system is ready.
.
“Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone
and asks if you would like to select that tone.
If you say no, the system plays the next
ringtone available and continues to cycle
through the ringtones until you select one or
quit.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in the P (Park) position.
The SA mode will stop if:
.
The
button is pressed for more than 5
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
seconds in SA mode.
.
.
The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
.
“Silent” — The system asks you to confirm
your wish to disable the ringtone.
4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free
The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or
LOCK position.
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-
tion mode”.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs you to
say the following phrases.
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of
dialect users to train the system to improve
recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model
of their own voice that is stored in the system.
The system is capable of storing a different
speaker adaptation model for memory A and
memory B.
5. Press the
button.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)
.
.
.
.
.
phone book new entry
dial three oh four two nine
delete call back number
setup pair phone
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, the press the
button.
If memory A is available, the system will use
memory A to store the model. If memory A is in
use and memory B is available, the system will
use memory B to store the model. If both of the
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
memo pad play
4-96 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
eight pause nine three two pause seven
delete all entries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
four three pause two nine pause zero
delete redial number
phone book list names
call eight oh five four one
Correction
call seven two four zero nine
phone book delete entry
memo pad record
dial star two one seven oh
Yes
setup change ringtone
dial seven four oh one eight
setup main menu
No
select ringtone
Delete
dial eight five six nine two
Bluetooth on
dial nine seven two six six
memo pad delete
setup change priority
call three one nine oh two
nine seven pause pause three oh eight
Cancel
call seven six three oh one
go back
call five six two eight zero
dial six six four three seven
call back number
call star two zero nine five
delete phone
dial eight three zero five one
Home
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
System fails to interpret the command
correctly.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to
use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the
recognition response for the speaker. (See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section.)
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the
“List Names” command. (See “PHONE BOOK” earlier in this section.)
The system consistently selects the
wrong entry (voicetag) from the phone
book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-98 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free
operation of the systems equipped on this
vehicle in one of two modes, Standard Mode
or Alternate Command Mode.
mode description later in this section.
To improve the recognition success rate when
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that
Alternate Command Mode be turned off and
Standard Mode be used for the best recognition
performance.
In Standard Mode, commands that are available
are always shown on the display and announced
by the system. You can complete your desired
operation by simply following the prompts given
by the system. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOG-
NITION STANDARD MODE” later in this section
for details.) In this mode, hands-free operation of
Audio, Air Conditioner and Display is not
available through NISSAN Voice Recognition.
For the voice commands for the navigation
system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
Manual of your vehicle.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
STANDARD MODE
For advanced operation, you can use the
Alternate Command Mode that enables the
operation of the display, audio, and air condi-
tioner through NISSAN Voice Recognition. (See
“NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE
COMMAND MODE” later in this section for
details.) When this mode is active, an expanded
list of commands can be spoken after pushing
SAA1566
The following section is applicable when the
Standard Mode is activated. (This mode is
selected by default for U.S. customers.)
Activating Standard Mode
When the Alternate Command Mode is active,
perform the following steps to switch to the
Standard Mode.
The Standard Mode enables you to complete
the desired operation by simply following the
prompts that appear on the display and also are
announced by the system. Hands-free operation
of Audio, Air Conditioner and Display systems is
not available in this mode.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
the TALK
switch, and the voice command
menu prompts are turned off. Note that in this
mode the recognition success rate may be
affected as the number of available commands
and the ways of speaking each command are
increased.
2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display
and then push the ENTER button.
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
then push the ENTER button.
For U.S. customers, the Standard Mode is
selected by default. For Canadian customers,
the Alternate Command Mode is the default
mode. To switch one mode to another, see each
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available items:
.
.
.
.
.
Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
SAA1917
SAA2164
Help on Speaking
4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
command recognition by the system.
key and push the ENTER button.
panel.
5. The indicator turns off and the Standard
Mode activates.
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using
the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
Voice Recognition Settings
Describes the available voice recognition
settings.
Displaying user guide
3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition
system for the first time or you do not know
how to operate it, you can display the User
Guide for confirmation.
Note that the Command List feature is only
available when Alternate Command Mode is
active.
4. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-
troller and push the ENTER button.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which
contains basic instructions and tutorials for
several voice commands.
You can skip steps 1 and 2 above if you say
“Help”.
4-100 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recognition.
SAA1904
SAA2165
Getting Started
Useful tips for correct operation
Before using the NISSAN Voice Recognition
system for the first time, you can confirm how to
use commands by viewing the Getting Started
section of the User Guide.
You can display useful speaking tips to help the
system recognize your voice commands cor-
rectly.
Highlight “Help on Speaking” and push the
1. Highlight “Getting Started” and push the
ENTER button.
ENTER button.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen using the NISSAN controller.
Tutorials on the operation of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system
If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or
“Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to
perform these operations using NISSAN Voice
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
commands. If the TALK
switch is pushed
before the initialization completes, the display
will show the message: “Phonetic data down-
loaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.
Before starting
To get the best recognition performance from
NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the follow-
ing:
.
The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent
the system from correctly recognizing the
voice commands.
SAA2166
SAA1859
Voice recognition settings
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system are described.
Giving voice commands
.
.
.
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
1. Push the TALK
steering wheel.
switch located on the
Speak in a natural conversational voice
without pausing between words.
1. Highlight “Voice Recognition Settings” and
push the ENTER button.
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen using the NISSAN controller.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. When
completed, the system is ready to accept voice
4-102 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
shown on the display and spoken through
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
those that are displayed are not accepted.
Please follow the prompts given by the
system.
General rule
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For
example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero
zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)
Examples
.
If the command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say again”.
Repeat the command in a clear voice.
.
1-800-662-6200
— “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
.
.
Push the BACK button once to return to the
previous screen.
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers
If you want to cancel the command, push
You can improve the recognition of phone
numbers by saying the phone number in three
groups of numbers. For example, when you try to
call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first,
and the system will then ask you for the next
three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After
recognition, the system will then ask for the last
four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this
method of phone digit entry can improve
recognition performance.
and hold the TALK
message, “Voice cancelled” will be an-
nounced.
switch. The
SAA1908
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Would you like
to access Phone, Navigation, Information or
Help?”.
.
.
Push the TALK
operation. Push the TALK
to restart the operation.
switch to pause the
switch again
If you want to adjust the volume of the
system feedback, push the volume control
buttons [+] or [−] on the steering switch or
use the audio system volume knob while the
system is making an announcement.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
command.
to
, speak a
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is
included in the house number, it will not be
recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
speak “oh” instead of “zero”. You can only say
“zero” for “0 (zero)”.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
and speak after the tone sounds until your
desired operation is completed.
How to speak numbers:
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers when giving voice
commands. Refer to the following examples.
Operating tips:
.
.
Say a command after the tone.
Commands that are available are always
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command List
Category Command:
Command
Phone
Action
Operates Phone function
Operates Navigation function
Displays vehicle Information function
Displays User Guide
Navigation
Information
Help
.
Phone Command:
Command
Action
Dial Number
Redial
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Makes a call to the latest dialed number.
Phonebook
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized. (Available during phone number entry)
International Call
Change Number
.
Navigation Command:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Information Command:
.
Command
Fuel Economy
Action
Displays fuel economy information.
Displays maintenance information.
Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Maintenance
Traffic Info.
4-104 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice command examples
To use the NISSAN Voice Recognition function,
speaking one command is sometimes sufficient,
but at other times it is necessary to speak two or
more commands. As examples, some additional
basic operations by voice commands are
described here.
For navigation system commands, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
SAA1859
SAA1908
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information or
Help?”
Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone
number 800-662-6200:
1. Push the TALK
steering wheel.
switch located on the
3. Speak “Phone”.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA1909
SAA1910
SAA1911
4. Speak “Dial Number”.
5. Speak “8 0 0”.
6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
7. Speak “6 6 2”.
4-106 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats.
If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
.
.
Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
If the system does not recognize your
command, please try repeating the com-
mand using a natural voice. Speaking too
slow or too loudly may further decrease
recognition performance.
SAA1912
SAA1913
8. The system announces, “Please say the last
four digits” or say change number.
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change
Number?”
9. Speak “6 2 0 0”.
11. Speak “Dial”.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662-6200.
Note:
.
You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-
tinuous digits), if the area code is not
necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit group-
ing is recommended for improved recogni-
tion. (See “How to speak numbers” earlier in
this section.)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA1859
SAA1908
SAA1909
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information or
Help?”
4. Speak “International Call”.
Example 2 - Placing an international call to
the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:
1. Push the TALK
steering wheel.
switch located on the
3. Speak “Phone”.
4-108 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION AL-
TERNATE COMMAND MODE
The following section is applicable when Alter-
nate Command Mode is activated. (This mode is
selected by default for Canadian customers.)
The Alternate Command Mode enables the
operation of the display, audio, and air condi-
tioner through Voice Recognition. When this
mode is active, an expanded list of commands
can be spoken after pushing the TALK
switch, and the voice command menu prompts
are turned off.
Please note that in this mode the recognition
success rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and ways of speaking each
command are increased. To improve the recog-
nition success rate, try using the Speaker
Adaptation Function available in that mode.
(See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate
Command Mode)” later in this section.)
SAA1914
SAA1915
5. Speak “01181111222333”.
6. Speak “Dial”.
7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222-
3333.
Note:
Any digit input format is available in the
International Number input process.
In the Alternate Command Mode, review the
expanded command list for this mode, as some
commands available in the Standard Mode are
replaced. Please see the examples on the
screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA1566
SAA2168
SAA1545
4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
Activating Alternate Command Mode
key and push the ENTER button.
panel.
When the Standard Mode is active, perform the
following steps to switch to the Alternate
Command Mode.
5. The confirmation message is displayed on
the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate
the Alternate Command Mode.
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using
the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
3. Highlight the “Command List” key using the
NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
Displaying command list
2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display
If you are controlling the system by voice
commands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
and then push the ENTER button.
You can skip steps 1 and 2 above if you say
“Help”.
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
then push the ENTER button.
4-110 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA1901
SAA2031
4. Highlight a category using the NISSAN
5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-
controller and push the ENTER button.
troller and push the ENTER button.
6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
NISSAN controller to view the entire list.
7. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of help commands
Navigation Commands:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Phone Commands:
COMMAND
ACTION
Redial
Redials the phone number last dialed.
Dial Number
Phonebook
Dials the phone number given in the command.
Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list.
Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).
Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).
Outgoing Calls
Incoming Calls
International Call
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Audio Commands:
.
Music Box
COMMAND
COMMAND
ACTION
Music Box
Turns on the “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.
.
Radio
ACTION
Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Radio
Radio AM
Radio FM
4-112 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Satellite
COMMAND
COMMAND
COMMAND
COMMAND
ACTION
Satellite Radio
CD
Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
.
ACTION
CD
Audio
Starts to play a CD.
.
ACTION
Audio OFF
iPod®
Turns the audio system off.
.
ACTION
iPod®
Turns the iPod® system on.
Vehicle Information Commands:
COMMAND
Traffic Info.
ACTION
Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Displays the Fuel Economy screen.
Fuel Economy
Maintenance
Displays the Maintenance screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Commands:
COMMAND
ACTION
Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.
Turns the climate control system off.
Climate Control
Climate Control OFF
4-114 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
.
.
Voice Recognition Settings
Describes the available voice recognition
settings.
Adapting the System to Your Voice.
SAA1783
SAA2170
Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.
4. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-
Displaying user guide
troller and push the ENTER button.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. When
completed, the system is ready to accept voice
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which
contains basic instructions and tutorials for
several voice commands.
Available items:
.
.
.
Getting Started
Describe the basics of how to operate the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
commands. If the TALK
switch is pushed
Using the Address Book
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using
the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
before the initialization completes the display will
show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded.
Please wait.” or a beep sounds.
Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.
3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)
Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
When the air conditioner is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition.
.
.
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
SAA1859
switch
SAA1932
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Please say a
command”.
Giving voice command
1. Push and release the TALK
located on the steering wheel.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
command.
to
, speak a
Operating tips:
.
.
.
Voice commands cannot be accepted when
the icon is
.
The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting
the ENTER switch on the steering wheel.
If the command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say again”.
4-116 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat the command in a clear voice.
Phone numbers
.
.
Push the BACK button once to return to the
previous screen.
Speak phone numbers according to the follow-
ing examples:
If you want to cancel the command, push
.
1-800-662-6200
and hold the TALK
switch for 1 second.
— “Dial one eight zero zero six six two zero
zero.”
The message “Voice canceled” will be
announced.
Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone
dialing results, say phone numbers as single
digits.
.
.
Push the TALK
the operation. Push the TALK
restart the operation.
switch again to pause
switch to
Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousands”.
If you want to adjust the volume of the
system feedback, push the volume control
buttons (+ or −) on the steering wheel or
use the audio system volume knob while the
system is making an announcement.
SAA1907
Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak
the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is
included in the house number, it will not be
recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
speak “oh” instead of “zero”. You can only say
“zero” for “0 (Zero)”.
Speaker adaptation function (for Alter-
nate Command Mode)
The voice recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.
How to speak numbers:
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers when giving voice
commands. Refer to the following examples.
Having the system learn the user’s voice:
General rule
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel, highlight the “Others” key on the
display and then push the ENTER button.
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For
example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero
zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
then push the ENTER button.
3. Highlight the “Speaker Adaptation” key and
then push the ENTER button.
SAA1918
SAA2171
4. Select the user whose voice is memorized
5. Select a category to be learned by the
system from the following list and then push
the ENTER button.
by the system and push the ENTER button.
.
.
.
.
.
Navigation
Phone
Audio
Information
Climate
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.
4-118 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Select a voice command and then push the
ENTER button.
The voice recognition system starts.
SAA1921
SAA1922
7. The system requests that you repeat a
command after a tone.
Speaker Adaptation function settings:
Edit Name
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed
on the screen.
screen changes from
the command that the system requested.
to
, speak
Store Result
9. When the system has recognized the voice
command, the voice of the user is learned.
When this item is turned to ON, the voice
recognition system can easily recognize the
user’s voice that it has learned.
Push the
to the previous screen.
switch or BACK button to return
Reset Result
If the system has learned the command cor-
rectly, the voice command indicator on the
screen turns on.
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-
tion system has learned.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continuous Learning
When this item is turned to ON, you can have
the system learn the voice commands in
succession, without selecting commands one
by one.
Minimize voice feedback (for Alternate
Command Mode)
To minimize the voice feedback from the system,
perform the following steps.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the
NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
then push the ENTER button.
4. Highlight the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key
and push the ENTER button.
5. The item is turned to ON and the vocal
feedback is reduced if the voice recognition
system is activated.
4-120 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the
appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the
system fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” earlier in this section; page 4-75.)
The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in
the phonebook.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
4-122 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2
Three-way catalyst.......................................... 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 5-3
Off-road recovery........................................... 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss.................................... 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...................... 5-7
Driving safety precautions ................................ 5-7
Push-button ignition switch .................................. 5-9
Intelligent Key system...................................... 5-9
Push-button ignition switch operation................ 5-10
Steering lock (if so equipped) ......................... 5-10
Push-button ignition switch positions ................ 5-11
Key port..................................................... 5-11
Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................... 5-12
Before starting the engine .................................. 5-12
Starting the engine ........................................... 5-13
Driving the vehicle............................................ 5-13
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT).......... 5-13
Parking brake .................................................. 5-17
Cruise control ................................................. 5-18
Precautions on cruise control.......................... 5-18
Cruise control operations ............................... 5-18
Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-20
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch operations.... 5-21
AWD warning light ....................................... 5-22
Parking/parking on hills...................................... 5-24
Power steering ................................................ 5-25
Brake system .................................................. 5-25
Braking precautions...................................... 5-25
Parking brake break-in................................... 5-25
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...................... 5-26
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-27
Cold weather driving......................................... 5-29
Freeing a frozen door lock.............................. 5-29
Anti-freeze.................................................. 5-29
Battery ...................................................... 5-29
Draining of coolant water ............................... 5-29
Tire equipment ............................................ 5-29
Special winter equipment............................... 5-29
Driving on snow or ice .................................. 5-29
Engine block heater (if so equipped)................. 5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
dangerous. It can cause uncon-
sciousness or death.
.
If a special body, camper or other
equipment is added for recreational
or other usage, follow the manufac-
turer’s recommendation to prevent
carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle
appliances such as stoves, refrig-
erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-
erate carbon monoxide.)
WARNING
.
If you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, drive with
all windows fully open, and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
.
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. They
could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
.
.
Do not run the engine in closed
spaces such as a garage.
Do not park the vehicle with the
engine running for any extended
length of time.
.
The exhaust system and body
should be inspected by a qualified
mechanic whenever:
sunny days, temperatures in
a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
.
Keep the lift gate closed while
driving, otherwise exhaust gases
could be drawn into the passenger
compartment. If you must drive with
the lift gate open, follow these
precautions:
— The vehicle is raised for service.
— You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
— You notice a change in the
sound of the exhaust system.
1. Open all the windows.
— You have had an accident invol-
ving damage to the exhaust
system, underbody, or rear of
the vehicle.
2. Set the
air recirculation to off
and the fan control to high to
circulate the air.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
.
If electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the lift gate or
the body, follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
WARNING
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless car-
bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
5-2 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
vehicle inspected promptly by a
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
.
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dama-
ging the three-way catalyst.
.
.
The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people,
animals or flammable materials
away from the exhaust system com-
ponents.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
.
.
Do not race the engine while warm-
ing it up.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
.
.
Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-
its from leaded gasoline will ser-
iously reduce the three-way
catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex-
haust pollutants.
Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-
functions in the ignition, fuel injec-
tion, or electrical systems can cause
overrich fuel flow into the three-way
catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do
not keep driving if the engine mis-
fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-
mance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
Starting and driving 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-
ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
“FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
Additional information
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
.
The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
WARNING
.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
.
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If the light still illuminates
while driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. (See
.
.
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in
low ambient temperature, check the tire
pressure for all four tires.
CAUTION
.
.
The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried
in snow.
For additional information, see “Low tire pres-
5-4 Starting and driving
Do not place metalized film or any
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
so.
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the
windows. This may cause poor re-
ception of the signals from the tire
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
not function properly.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is
significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-
OVER
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. Some examples are:
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
.
.
.
Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
They have higher ground clearance than pas-
senger cars to make them capable of performing
in a variety of on-pavement and off-road
applications. This gives them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of
higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
However, they are not designed for cornering
at the same speeds as conventional passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover. Seat belts help
reduce the risk of injury in collisions and
rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or
improperly belted person is significantly more
If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering
maneuvers, because these driving practices
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,
particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all
times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs
(including prescription or over-the-counter
drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always
wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT
BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do
If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/
AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
da.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
Starting and driving 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
likely to be injured or killed than a person
properly wearing a seat belt.
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the
appropriate driving lane.
WARNING
Be sure to read “DRIVING SAFETY PRECAU-
TIONS” later in this section.
.
If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based on
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gra-
dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe
place off the road.
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air
pressure. Losing control of the vehicle
may cause a collision and result in
personal injury.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
.
The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due
to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure
loss can also be caused by driving on under-
inflated tires.
.
.
Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
Do not rapidly release the accelera-
tor pedal.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
.
Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-
taining the correct air pressure and visually
inspect the tires for wear and damage. See
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle back onto the road surface until
vehicle speed is reduced.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”
while driving maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
5-6 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “CHANGING A
FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section of this Owner’s Manual.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,
prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if
your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by
alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
Instead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-road
vehicles can tip over sideways much
more easily than they can forward or
backward.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
.
Many hills are too steep for any
vehicle. If you drive up them, you
may stall. If you drive down them,
you may not be able to control your
speed. If you drive across them, you
may roll over.
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep
water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly
designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional
off-road vehicle.
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-
stream reduces coordination, delays
reaction time and impairs judgement.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases
the likelihood of being involved in an
accident injuring yourself and others.
Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the se-
verity of the injury.
.
.
Do not shift ranges while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-
els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) models for rough road driving and
extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or
the like.
Stay alert when driving to the top of
a hill. At the top there could be a
drop-off or other hazard that could
cause an accident.
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
.
If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill,
never attempt to turn around. Your
vehicle could tip or roll over. Always
back straight down in R (Reverse)
range. Never back down in N (Neu-
tral), using only the brake, as this
could cause loss of control.
.
Drive carefully when off the road
and avoid dangerous areas. Every
person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should be seated with their
seat belt fastened. This will keep
you and your passengers in position
when driving over rough terrain.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.
Although the local laws vary on what is
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is
that alcohol affects all people differently and
most people underestimate the effects of
alcohol.
.
Heavy braking going down a hill
could cause your brakes to overheat
.
Do not drive across steep slopes.
Starting and driving 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and fade, resulting in loss of control
and an accident. Apply brakes
lightly and use a low range to
control your speed.
that the driver and all passengers
have their seat belts fastened.
are raised off the ground. Make sure
you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with
.
.
Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may became hot.
AWD before it is placed on
a
dynamometer. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury. (AWD models)
.
.
Unsecured cargo can be thrown
around when driving over rough
terrain. Properly secure all cargo
so it will not be thrown forward
and cause injury to you or your
passengers.
Lower your speed when encounter-
ing strong crosswinds. With a higher
center of gravity, your NISSAN is
more affected by strong side winds.
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle
control.
.
.
.
When a wheel is off the ground due
to an unlevel surface, do not spin
the wheel excessively.
To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load. Secure heavy loads in the
cargo area as far forward and as
low as possible. Do not equip the
vehicle with tires larger than speci-
fied in this manual. This could cause
your vehicle to roll over.
.
.
Do not drive beyond the perfor-
mance capability of the tires, even
with AWD engaged.
Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with
the engine running. Doing so may
result in drivetrain damage or un-
expected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high
speeds. Your vehicle has a higher
center of gravity than a conventional
passenger car. The vehicle is not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger
cars. Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly could result in loss of
control and/or a rollover accident.
.
.
Do not grip the inside or spokes of
the steering wheel when driving off-
road. The steering wheel could
move suddenly and injure your
hands. Instead drive with your fin-
gers and thumbs on the outside of
the rim.
.
Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-
namometer (such as the dynam-
ometers used by some states for
emissions testing), or similar equip-
ment even if the other two wheels
.
Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
Before operating the vehicle, ensure
5-8 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
belted or radial), and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Install tire chains
on the front wheels when driving on
slippery roads and drive carefully.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except
in an emergency. (The engine will stop
when the ignition switch is pushed 3
consecutive times or the ignition switch
is pushed and held for more than 2
seconds.) If the engine stops while the
vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.
.
.
.
Be sure to check the brakes imme-
diately after driving in mud or water.
See “BRAKE SYSTEM” later in this
section for wet brakes.
Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle
and it rolls forward, backward or
sideways, you could be injured.
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
Whenever you drive off-road
through sand, mud or water as deep
as the wheel hub, more frequent
maintenance may be required. See
the maintenance information in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”.
SSD0436
The Intelligent Key system can operate the
ignition switch without taking the Intelligent
Key out from your pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may
affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Operating range
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
for starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is
1
*
within the specified operating range
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key
system’s operating range becomes narrower
and may not function properly.
CAUTION
.
Spinning the front wheels on slip-
pery surfaces may cause the AWD
warning light to flash and the AWD
system to automatically switch from
the AWD mode to the 2WD mode.
This could reduce traction. Be espe-
cially careful when towing a trailer.
(AWD models)
.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehi-
cle.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn
the ignition switch to start the engine.
Never leave the Intelligent Key in-
side the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
The cargo area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key may
function.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to LOCK
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box or
door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not
function.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)
position.
.
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will
change to the LOCK position.
The selector lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
SSD0910
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
OPERATION
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch
position will change as follows:
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
turned from the LOCK position.
.
.
.
Push center once to change to ACC.
Push center two times to change to ON.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display
between the speedometer and tachometer. (See
“DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
Push center three times to change to OFF.
(No position illuminates.)
STEERING LOCK (if so equipped)
.
.
Push center four times to return to ACC.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn
from the straight up position.
Open or close any door to return to LOCK
during the OFF position.
5-10 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lock the steering wheel, push the
ignition switch to the OFF position and
open any door. To unlock the steering
wheel, push the ignition switch. If the
steering lock release malfunction indicator
appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal
display, push the push-button ignition
switch again while lightly turning the
steering wheel right and left. (See “DOT
MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.)
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
OFF
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
CAUTION
SSD0837
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
Do not leave the vehicle with the push-
button ignition switch in ACC or ON
positions when the engine is not run-
ning for an extended period. This can
discharge the battery.
KEY PORT
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
in the Intelligent Key port.
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio, when the engine is not
running.
Starting and driving 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
.
.
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-
CHARGE
ment.
.
.
Make sure the Intelligent Key is in
the correct direction when inserting
it to the key port. The engine may
not start if it is in the incorrect
direction.
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost
B
discharged, the guide light
A
*
of the key port
*
blinks and the indicator appears on the dot
matrix liquid crystal display. (See “DOT MATRIX
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.)
.
.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the
key port after the ignition switch is
pushed to the OFF position.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the
A
port
allows you to start the engine. Make
*
sure that the key ring side faces backward as
illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port
until it is latched and secured.
.
.
Lock all doors.
Position seats and adjust head restraints/
headrests.
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
the ignition switch to the OFF position and pull
the Intelligent Key out of the port.
.
.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
NOTE:
The key port does not charge the key
battery. If you see the low battery indicator
in the dot matrix liquid crystal display,
replace the battery as soon as possible.
(See “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
.
Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
CAUTION
.
Never place anything except the
Intelligent Key in the key port. Doing
so may cause damage to the equip-
5-12 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING THE ENGINE
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
1. Apply the parking brake.
the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-
button ignition switch to start the engine.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT)
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
in your vehicle is electronically controlled to
produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The starter is designed not to operate unless
the selector lever is in either of the above
positions.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
CAUTION
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and push the
ignition switch to start the engine.
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to OFF and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
.
If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restart-
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and
while holding, crank the engine. Release
the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
4. Warm-up
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the selector
lever out of the P (Park) position.
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance first,
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -
3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
This CVT is designed so that the foot
brake pedal must be depressed before
shifting from P (Park) to any driving
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
.
If the engine is very hard to start
because it is flooded, depress the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to
the ON position to start cranking the
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition switch
to OFF. After cranking the engine,
release the accelerator pedal. Crank
The selector lever cannot be moved out
of the P (Park) position and into any of
the other positions if the ignition
switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position.
5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever to
the P (Park) position and push the ignition
switch to the OFF position.
Starting and driving 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the selector lever to a driving position.
CAUTION
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in
motion.
.
.
When stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
The foot brake should be used for
this purpose.
WARNING
Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
.
Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while shifting from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or L (Low) position. Always
depress the brake pedal until shift-
ing is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
SSD0691
Shifting
To move the selector lever,
.
.
Cold engine idle speed is high, so
use caution when shifting into a
forward or reverse gear before the
engine has warmed up.
A
*
:
Push the button
the brake pedal.
while depressing
A
:
:
Push the button
.
*
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-
verse) while vehicle is moving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
Just move the selector lever.
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal, push the selector lever button and move
the selector lever from the P (Park) position to
any of the desired shift positions.
5-14 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse):
WARNING
Use this position to back up. Make sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed and the selector lever
button pushed in to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
driving position to R (Reverse).
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine
is not running. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in serious
personal injury or property damage.
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You
may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled
engine while the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
only when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
SSD0692
D (Drive):
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the
selector lever in the D (Drive) position, the
indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates.
P (Park):
L (Low):
Use this selector position when the vehicle is
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the selector
lever button pushed in to move the selec-
tor lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Use this position for maximum engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes
and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not
use the L position in any other circumstances.
Use the overdrive off mode when you need
improved engine braking.
To turn off the overdrive off mode, push the O/D
OFF switch again. The
turn off.
indicator light will
Each time the engine is started, or when the
selector lever is shifted to any position other
than the D (Drive) position, the overdrive off
mode will be automatically turned off.
Starting and driving 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
seconds. Then turn the ignition switch
back to the ON position. The vehicle
should return to its normal operating
condition. If it does not return to its normal
operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer
check the transmission and repair if ne-
cessary.
Accelerator downshift
— In D position —
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the
transmission down into a lower gear, depending
on the vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection mode
WARNING
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
comes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
power and, under some conditions, vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
limited.
When the high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode or fail-safe operation
occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually
reduced. The reduced speed may be
lower than other traffic, which could
increase the chance of a collision. Be
especially careful when driving. If ne-
cessary, pull to the side of the road at a
safe place and allow the transmission
to return to normal operation, or have it
repaired if necessary.
SSD0693
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
selector lever may not be moved from the P
(Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the selector lever button pushed.
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-
ning and subsequent hard braking, the
fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL
may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-
dicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.) This will occur even
if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position and wait for 10
To move the selector lever, perform the following
procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
A
*
3. Remove the shift lock release cover
using a suitable tool.
B
*
4. Push down the shift lock release
using a
5-16 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
suitable tool.
WARNING
C
5. Push the selector lever button
and move
*
the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position
.
Be sure the parking brake is fully
D
while holding down the shift lock
*
released before driving. Failure to
do so can cause brake failure and
lead to an accident.
release.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position to
unlock the steering wheel (if so equipped). The
vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
.
.
Do not release the parking brake
from outside the vehicle.
If the battery is discharged completely, the
steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not
move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.
Do not use the gear shift in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
Replace the removed shift lock release cover
after the operation.
SPA2331
.
Do not leave children unattended in
a vehicle. They could release the
parking brake and cause an acci-
dent.
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the
P (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check
the CVT system as soon as possible.
1
*
.
To release:
2
1. Firmly apply the foot brake
.
*
WARNING
1
2. Depress the parking brake pedal
and
*
If the selector lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position while the
engine is running and the brake pedal
is depressed, the stop lights may not
work. Malfunctioning stop lights could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.
the parking brake will be released.
3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
Starting and driving 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-
TROL
.
.
on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
in very windy areas
.
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in-
dicator light on the meter panel will then
blink to warn the driver.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
.
.
.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes
excessively high, the cruise control system
will cancel automatically.
If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SSD0694
The CRUISE indicator light may blink when
the cruise control main switch is turned ON
while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE,
SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To prop-
erly set the cruise control system, perform
the following procedures.
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
2. SET/COAST switch
3. CANCEL switch
4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
WARNING
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving under the following conditions:
.
.
.
when it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed
To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN
switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will
illuminate.
in heavy traffic or in traffic that
varies in speed
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST
on winding or hilly roads
5-18 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
switch and release it. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the
set speed.
canceled.
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH
(40 km/h).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
.
To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously
set speed.
.
.
.
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the SET/COAST switch.
Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch. When the vehicle attains the desired
speed, release the switch.
.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,
drive without the cruise control.
Push, then quickly release the RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by about 1
MPH (1.6 km/h).
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
a) Push the CANCEL switch.
b) Tap the brake pedal.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE light
will turn off.
.
.
.
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it.
.
If you depress the brake pedal while pushing
the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/
COAST switch and reset at the cruising
speed, the cruise control will disengage.
Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn
it on again.
Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
.
.
The cruise control will automatically cancel if
the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13
km/h) below the set speed.
If you move the selector lever to the N
(Neutral) position, the cruise control will be
Starting and driving 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
(See “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATION” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.)
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance and
ensure the future reliability and econo-
my of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may
result in shortened engine life and
reduced engine performance.
.
.
.
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.
Select a gear range suitable to road condi-
tions.
.
.
.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Keep your engine tuned up.
.
Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
.
.
.
.
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
.
.
.
.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-
omy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
5-20 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so
equipped)
LOCK mode
The AWD LOCK indicator light
illuminate.
WARNING
will
.
For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with
the engine running. Doing so may
result in drivetrain damage or un-
expected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury.
AUTO mode
The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.
AWD
AWD
mode
LOCK Use condi-
indica- tions
tor light
Wheel driven
Distribution of tor-
que to the front and
rear wheels changes
automatically, de-
pending on road
.
Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-
namometer (such as the dynam-
ometers used by some states for
emissions testing) or similar equip-
ment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure
that you inform the test facility
personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using
the wrong test equipment may re-
sult in drivetrain damage or unex-
pected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury.
SSD0418
For driving
Turns
off.
on paved
or slippery
roads
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK
AUTO conditions encoun-
tered
SWITCH OPERATIONS
[100:0] ↔ [50:50].
This results in im-
proved driving stabi-
lity.*1
The AWD LOCK switch located on the lower
side of the instrument panel. This switch is used
to select the AUTO or LOCK mode depending
on the driving conditions.
AWD
For driving
Each time you push the lower part of the switch
LOCK All-wheel drive*2, *3 LOCK on rough
roads
A
*
, the AWD mode will switch:
AUTO ? LOCK ? AUTO.
*1: When the rotation difference between the
front and rear wheels is large, the AWD
mode may change from AUTO to LOCK for
a while, however, this is not a malfunction.
Starting and driving 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*2: LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode
automatically when the vehicle has been
driven at a high speed. The AWD LOCK
indicator light turns off.
WARNING
.
When driving straight, shift the AWD
LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not oper-
ate the AWD LOCK switch when
making a turn or backing up.
*3: LOCK mode will automatically be cancelled
when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
.
.
Do not operate the AWD LOCK
switch with the front wheel spin-
ning.
.
If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while
accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition
switch is turned off, you may feel a jolt. This
is normal.
Engine idling speed is high while
warming up the engine. Be espe-
cially careful when starting or driv-
ing on slippery surfaces.
.
The oil temperature of power train parts will
increase if the vehicle is continuously
operated under conditions where the differ-
ence in rotation between the front and rear
wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when
driving the vehicle on rough roads through
sand, mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In
these cases, the AWD warning light blinks
rapidly and the AWD mode changes to
2WD to protect the powertrain parts. If you
stop driving with the engine idling and wait
until the warning light stops blinking, the
AWD returns to the AUTO mode.
.
When turning the vehicle in LOCK
mode on paved roads, you may feel
a braking effect. This is a normal
condition of the AWD model.
SSD0336B
AWD WARNING LIGHT
The AWD warning light is located in the meter.
The AWD warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. It
turns off soon after the engine is started.
5-22 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system
while the engine is running, the warning light will
come on.
checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
.
.
The powertrain may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warn-
ing light blinking.
The warning light may blink rapidly (about twice
per second) while trying to free a stuck vehicle
due to high powertrain oil temperature. The
driving mode may change to 2WD. The AUTO
mode may change to the LOCK mode before the
warning light blinks. If the warning light blinks
rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle with
the engine idling in a safe place immediately.
Then if the light turns off after a while, you can
continue driving.
Never drive on dry hard surface
roads in the LOCK mode, as this
will overload the powertrain and
may cause a serious malfunction.
A large difference between the diameters of
front and rear wheels will make the warning light
blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Pull
off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire
pressure is correct and tires are not worn.
CAUTION
.
.
If the warning light remains on after
the above operation, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
If the warning light comes on while
driving there may be a malfunction
in the AWD system. Reduce the
vehicle speed and have your vehicle
Starting and driving 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1
.
.
.
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
*
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
2
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
*
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3
CURB:
*
SSD0488
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from
the center of the road if it moves.
go and cannot be moved without
depressing the foot brake pedal.
WARNING
4. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
.
.
Never leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended.
.
.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
Safe parking procedures require
that both the parking brake be set
and the transmission placed into P
(Park). Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or
roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the selector lever has
been pushed as far forward as it can
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
5-24 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
or accelerating could cause the
wheels to skid and result in an
accident.
WARNING
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
Braking will be harder.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and the stopping
distance will be longer.
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, espe-
cially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will cause overheating of the
brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster
and reduce gas mileage.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up
the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to
normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds
until the brakes function correctly.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.
WARNING
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual and can be performed by a
NISSAN dealer.
.
While driving on a slippery surface,
be careful when braking, accelerat-
ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking
Starting and driving 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
Tire and Loading Information
label. See “TIRE AND LOADING
INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9.
Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping dis-
tances.
.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain
vehicle control during braking on
slippery surfaces. Remember that
stopping distances on slippery sur-
faces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping
distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered
roads, or if you are using tire chains.
Always maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Ultimately, the driver is responsible
for safety.
— For detailed information, see
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-your-
self” section of this manual.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward
or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may
hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses
a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and
illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then oper-
ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls
the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to
prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on
slippery surfaces.
Using the system
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
.
Tire type and condition may also
affect braking effectiveness.
Normal operation
— When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH
(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
— When installing a spare tire,
make sure that it is the proper
size and type as specified on the
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly
5-26 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-
ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the
following functions.
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This
action is similar to pumping the brakes very
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is
operating. This is normal and indicates that the
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-
tion may indicate that road conditions are
hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
.
.
You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
.
Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
See “Slip indicator light” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.
.
.
Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following
conditions:
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and
indicator lights come on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically
turns off when these indicator lights are on.
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the
steered path despite increased steering
input)
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to
indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC
switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC
system still operates to prevent one drive wheel
from slipping by transferring power to a non
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions).
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss
of vehicle control in all driving situations.
slipping drive wheel. The
if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and
the indicator will not flash. The VDC
indicator flashes
System is automatically reset to on when the
ignition switch is placed in the off position then
back to the on position.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes so note
the following:
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
.
The road may be slippery or the system may
Starting and driving 5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and
is not an indication of a malfunction.
indicator lights may illuminate.
surface.
.
If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extre-
mely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
.
.
If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
used, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
and
indicator lights may
indicator lights may illuminate.
WARNING
illuminate.
The VDC system is not a substitute
for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
.
The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but
does not prevent accidents due to
abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slip-
pery surfaces and always drive care-
fully.
.
.
If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
extremely deteriorated, both the
and
indicator lights may
illuminate.
When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked
corners, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs,
stabilizer bars, bushings and
wheels are not NISSAN recom-
mended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated the VDC sys-
tem may not operate properly. This
could adversely affect vehicle hand-
indicator lights may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of
roads.
.
When driving on an unstable sur-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
elevator or ramp, the
may flash or both
indicator
and
indicator lights may illuminate. This
is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
ling performance, and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
5-28 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
TIRE EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide
superior performance on dry pavement. How-
ever, the performance of these tires will be
substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-
tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,
speed rating and availability information.
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the
key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob.
.
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
ANTI-FREEZE
.
.
.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C),
check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter
protection. For additional information, see “EN-
GINE COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-
drifts.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires.
Extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
BATTERY
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should
be checked regularly. For additional information,
see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-
it-yourself” section.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
WARNING
.
Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick
and very hard to drive on. The
vehicle will have much less traction
or “grip” under these conditions. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until the
road is salted or sanded.
Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE
CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
If you install snow tires, they must also be the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern
on all four wheels.
.
Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels
Starting and driving 5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will lose even more traction.
To use the engine block heater
1. Turn the engine off.
starting the engine. Damage to the
cord could result in an electrical
shock and can cause serious injury.
.
Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pave-
ment.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
.
Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least
10A. Plug the extension cord into a
Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-
tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
Failure to use the proper extension
cord or a grounded outlet can result
in a fire or electrical shock and
cause serious personal injury.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
.
.
Allow greater following distances
on slippery roads.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a
patch of ice is seen ahead, brake
before reaching it. Try not to brake
while on the ice, and avoid any
sudden steering maneuvers.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on
outside temperatures, to properly warm the
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to
turn the engine block heater on.
.
.
Do not use cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle.
WARNING
.
Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical sys-
tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
be seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with
cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower.
.
Disconnect and properly store the
engine block heater cord before
5-30 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Starting and driving 5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
5-32 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 In case of emergency
Flat tire............................................................ 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 6-2
Changing a flat tire......................................... 6-2
Jump starting .................................................... 6-9
If your vehicle overheats..................................... 6-11
Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN ................... 6-13
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ........... 6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If the light still illuminates
while driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you
of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For
more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the selector lever to the P
(Park) position.
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
WARNING
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
.
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
WARNING
.
Make sure the parking brake is
securely applied and the transmis-
sion is shifted into the P (Park)
position.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
6-2 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Never change tires when the vehicle
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the lift gate.
2. Remove the cargo cover (if so equipped).
(See “CARGO COVER” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.)
Never change tires if oncoming
traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait
for professional road assistance.
3. Open the cargo floor board.
(See “CARGO FLOOR BOX” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.)
MCE0001A
Blocking wheels
1
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
*
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the
vehicle may move and result in personal
injury.
In case of emergency 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Type A:
Remove the cargo floor board.
Type B:
Turn the clips counterclockwise and remove
the cargo floor box.
SCE0853
SCE0854
Type B
Type A
5. Type B:
Open the cargo floor board.
SCE0715
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type B
6-4 In case of emergency
SCE0716
SCE0700
SCE0630
Jacking tools
Spare tire
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)
6. Remove the jacking tools and the spare tire.
Spare tire: Turn the clamp to remove the tire.
Jacking tools: Remove the jack by turning it,
then remove the other tools.
WARNING
Never use your hands to remove the
wheel cover. This may cause personal
injury.
1
*
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
as illustrated.
2
Apply cloth
between the wheel and jack rod
*
to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
In case of emergency 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
.
.
Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by the jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
on other vehicles. The jack is de-
signed for lifting only your vehicle
during a tire change.
SCE0572
Jack-up point
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
.
Use the correct jack-up points.
Never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
.
.
.
Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.
Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack, as it may
cause the vehicle to move.
.
Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
6-6 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCE0039
SCE0751
Installing the spare tire
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. (See specific instructions under the
heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands as shown above.
Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears
the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface
horizontally.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
1
2
3
4
5
as illustrated (
,
,
,
,
), more
* * * * *
In case of emergency 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
than 2 times, until they are tight.
tened to specifications at each lubrica-
tion interval.
spare tire are designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions
under the heading “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the
vehicle completely.
.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
pressure.
COLD pressure:
After the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label
affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Stowing the damaged tire and the tools
1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and
tools in the storage area.
.
.
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts. This could
cause the nuts to become loose.
2. Replace the cargo box.
3. Close the cargo floor board.
4. Close the lift gate.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
flat tire, etc.).
WARNING
.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
.
Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can
become dangerous projectiles in an
accident or sudden stop.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is
recommended that wheel nuts be tigh-
.
The T-type spare tire and small size
6-8 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be
followed.
protectors (for example, goggles or
industrial safety spectacles) and
remove rings, metal bands, or any
other jewelry. Do not lean over the
battery when jump starting.
WARNING
.
.
Do not attempt to jump start a
frozen battery. It could explode
and cause serious injury.
.
.
.
If done incorrectly, jump starting
can lead to a battery explosion,
resulting in severe injury or death.
It could also damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle has an automatic en-
gine cooling fan. It could come on at
any time. Keep hands and other
objects away from it.
Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away
from the battery.
SCE0719
Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
a corrosive sulfuric acid solution
which can cause severe burns. If
the fluid should come into contact
with anything, immediately flush the
contacted area with water.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause
personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
.
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
B
A
B
, position the two vehicles (
and
)
*
*
*
to bring their batteries into close proximity to
each other.
The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the selector
lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off all
.
Whenever working on or near a
battery, always wear suitable eye
In case of emergency 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH STARTING
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
unnecessary electrical systems (lights, hea-
ter, air conditioner, etc.).
and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
CAUTION
B
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly
wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion
hazard.
vehicle
at about 2,000 rpm, and start
*
A
*
the engine of the vehicle
started.
being jump
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started
or tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
CAUTION
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as
1
*
2
*
3
*
4
*
illustrated (
?
?
?
).
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position
and wait 10 seconds before trying
again.
For models with a steering wheel lock
mechanism, if the battery is discon-
nected or discharged, the steering
wheel will lock and cannot be turned.
Supply power using jumper cables
before pushing the ignition switch and
disengaging the steering lock.
7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
CAUTION
4
*
3
*
2
*
1
*
cable (
?
?
?
).
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
.
.
Always connect positive (+) to posi-
tive (+) and negative (−) to body
ground (for example, as illustrated),
not to the battery.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
B
*
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
6-10 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or
coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)
Do not open the hood further until no steam
or coolant can be seen.
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the reservoir tank with the
engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir
tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired
at a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not continue to drive if your
vehicle overheats. Doing so could
cause engine damage or a vehicle
fire.
4. Open the engine hood.
To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never remove the radiator
cap while the engine is still hot.
When the radiator cap is removed,
pressurized hot water will spurt out,
possibly causing serious injury.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
.
Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the
engine.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the selector
lever to the P (Park) position.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine
cooling fan can start at any time.
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
In case of emergency 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service
operators are familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator carefully
read the following precautions.
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOW-
ING” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
WARNING
.
.
Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
.
.
When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and drivetrain are in working condi-
tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies
must be used.
Always attach safety chains before
towing.
6-12 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCE0439
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the
vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
drivetrain.
In case of emergency 6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
never secure the steering wheel
by pushing the ignition switch to
the LOCK position. This may da-
mage the steering lock mechan-
ism.
.
Move the selector lever to the N
(Neutral) position.
.
When towing a CVT model with the
rear wheels on the ground (if you do
not use towing dollies): Always
release the parking brake.
SCE0438
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
or backward), as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to
the drivetrain. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
raised, always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as
illustrated.
For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models, see “All-
Wheel Drive (AWD) models” earlier in this
section.
.
When towing CVT models with the
front wheels on towing dollies:
.
Push the ignition switch to the
ACC or ON position, and secure
the steering wheel in a straight-
ahead position with a rope or
similar device. For models with a
steering wheel lock mechanism,
CAUTION
.
Never tow Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with
the front wheels on the ground or
four wheels on the ground (forward
6-14 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed
specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery
device.
Front:
Securely install the vehicle recovery hook
(stored in the cargo area) as illustrated. Make
sure that the hook is properly secured in the
original place after use.
CAUTION
SCE0718
Tie down and recovery hook
.
Tow chains or cables must be at-
tached only to the main structural
members of the vehicle or the
recovery hook. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle body will be damaged.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
WARNING
.
.
Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-
cle tie downs or recovery hooks.
.
.
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
SCE0717
Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode
and result in serious injury. Parts of
your vehicle could also overheat
and be damaged.
Front
Always pull the cable straight out
from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull on the vehicle at an angle.
.
Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the
suspension, steering, brake or cool-
ing systems.
In case of emergency 6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to remove the vehicle.
.
Pulling devices such as ropes or
canvas straps are not recommended
for use in vehicle towing or recov-
ery.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
.
.
.
.
Shift back and forth between R (Re-
verse) and D (Drive).
Apply the accelerator as little as possi-
ble to maintain the rocking motion.
Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
6-16 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior................................................ 7-2
Washing ...................................................... 7-2
Waxing ........................................................ 7-2
Removing spots............................................. 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels .................................... 7-3
Chrome parts................................................ 7-3
Tire dressing................................................. 7-3
Cleaning interior ................................................ 7-4
Air fresheners................................................ 7-4
Floor mats .................................................... 7-4
Seat belts .................................................... 7-5
Corrosion protection ........................................... 7-5
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion...................................................... 7-5
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion...................................................... 7-5
To protect your vehicle from corrosion................. 7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
CAUTION
To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle
as soon as you can:
.
Do not use car washes that use acid
in the detergent. Some car washes,
especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to func-
tion properly. Always check with
your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
.
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain
.
.
after driving on coastal roads
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface
by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs
get on the paint surface
WAXING
.
when dust or mud builds up on the surface
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing
is recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
reapplying wax.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
.
.
Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical
detergents, gasoline or solvents.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or while the vehicle body is
hot, as the surface may become
water-spotted.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
.
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
.
Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
WASHING
.
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a
base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean
water.
7-2 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOVING SPOTS
TIRE DRESSING
mage the electrical conductors, radio
antenna elements or rear window
defroster elements.
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive
accessory stores.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it
may react with the coating and form a com-
pound. This compound may come off the tire
while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a
mild soap solution, especially during winter
months in areas where road salt is used. Salt
could discolor the wheels if not removed.
UNDERBODY
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the
underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will
prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the
underbody and suspension. Before the winter
period and again in the spring, the underseal
must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
CAUTION
.
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
.
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire tread/
grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
.
Do not use a cleaner that uses
strong acid or alkali contents to
clean the wheels.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass
to become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
.
Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The
wheel temperature should be the
same as ambient temperature.
.
.
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire tread/
grooves.
.
Rinse the wheel to completely re-
move the cleaner within 15 minutes
after the cleaner is applied.
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by tire dressing manufacturer.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the win-
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could da-
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
Appearance and care 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-
pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean
with a dry soft cloth.
FLOOR MATS
and damaging to the leather sur-
faces and should be removed
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or am-
monia-based cleaners as they may
damage the leather’s natural finish.
The use of NISSAN floor mats can extend the
life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to
clean the interior. No matter what mats are
used, be sure they are fitted for your
vehicle and are properly positioned in the
footwell to prevent interference with pedal
operation. Mats should be maintained with
regular cleaning and replaced if they become
excessively worn.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
.
.
Only use fabric protectors approved
by NISSAN.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner
on meter or gauge lens covers. It
may damage the lens cover.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
.
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact
vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to hang
free and not contact an interior surface.
.
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
CAUTION
.
.
Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using air fresheners.
Small dirt particles can be abrasive
7-4 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-
BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap
solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before
using them.
.
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section.
.
Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the
vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-
sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely
inside the vehicle, and should be removed for
drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
SAI0038
Floor mat positioning aid
This model includes front floor mat brackets to
act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your
vehicle model. The front floor mats have
grommet holes in them. To install, simply
position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket
through the floor mat grommet hole while
centering the mat in the floor pan contour.
Periodically check to make certain that the mats
are properly positioned.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing where
atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt
is used.
Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate
of corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Appearance and care 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air pollution
this may damage them.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will
accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will
also accelerate the disintegration of paint
surfaces.
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
.
.
.
.
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some areas,
consult a NISSAN dealer.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
.
.
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic
components inside the vehicle as
7-6 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirement ..................................... 8-2
Scheduled maintenance................................... 8-2
General maintenance ...................................... 8-2
Where to go for service................................... 8-2
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-5
Engine compartment check locations ...................... 8-6
VQ35DE engine ............................................ 8-6
Engine cooling system......................................... 8-7
Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-7
Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-8
Engine oil......................................................... 8-8
Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-8
Changing engine oil and filter............................ 8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid........ 8-11
Power steering fluid.......................................... 8-11
Brake fluid...................................................... 8-12
Window washer fluid ........................................ 8-12
Battery .......................................................... 8-13
Jump starting .............................................. 8-14
Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) ...... 8-15
Drive belt ....................................................... 8-15
Spark plugs .................................................... 8-16
Replacing spark plugs................................... 8-16
Air cleaner...................................................... 8-16
Windshield wiper blades.................................... 8-17
Rear window wiper blade................................... 8-19
Brakes........................................................... 8-19
Self-adjusting brakes .................................... 8-19
Brake pad wear warning ................................ 8-19
Fuses............................................................ 8-20
Engine compartment ..................................... 8-20
Passenger compartment ................................ 8-21
Battery replacement.......................................... 8-21
Lights............................................................ 8-24
Headlights.................................................. 8-25
Exterior and interior lights............................... 8-27
Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-30
Tire pressure............................................... 8-30
Tire labeling ................................................ 8-33
Types of tires .............................................. 8-35
Tire chains.................................................. 8-36
Changing wheels and tires ............................. 8-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with long
service intervals to save you both time and
money. However, some day-to-day and regular
maintenance is essential to maintain your
NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well
as its emission and engine performance.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
Performing general maintenance checks re-
quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS”
later in this section.
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the main-
tenance chain.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
ITEMS
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership information systems.
They are completely qualified to work on
NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
For your convenience, both required and op-
tional scheduled maintenance items are de-
scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that
guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is
performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to
meet the maintenance requirements on your
vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors
and the engine hood operate properly. Also
ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the primary
latch is released.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal day-
to-day operation. They are essential for proper
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to
perform these procedures regularly as pre-
scribed.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-
ranty Information Booklet.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
with the selector lever in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a
damaged windshield repaired by a qualified
repair facility.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs
adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt
webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,
including the spare, to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive
wear.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure
they operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in every position. Check that the head
restraints/headrests move up and down
smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped)
hold securely in all latched positions.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to
stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for
wheel alignment.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater
or air conditioner.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See
“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)
of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-
late. For additional information, see “CLEANING
EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care”
section.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Under the hood and vehicle
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected
immediately.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe condition require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on
the reservoir.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances, other-
wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the
engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or mainte-
nance work on your vehicle, always take care
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or
damage to the vehicle. The following are general
precautions which should be closely observed.
enclosed space such as a garage, be
sure there is proper ventilation for
exhaust gases to escape.
.
.
.
Never leave the engine or the CVT
related component harnesses dis-
connected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
.
Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by a jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
Never connect or disconnect the
battery or any transistorized com-
ponent while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
WARNING
.
Park the vehicle on a level surface,
apply the parking brake securely
and block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from moving. Move the
selector lever to P (Park).
.
.
Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel tank and the
battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic engine cooling fan. It may
come on at any time without warn-
ing, even if the ignition key is in the
OFF position and the engine is not
running. To avoid injury, always
disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
The fuel filter or fuel lines should be
serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-
cause the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine is
off.
.
.
Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when per-
forming any parts replacement or
repairs.
If you must work with the engine
running, keep your hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from moving
fans, belts and any other moving
parts.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not work under the hood while
the engine is hot. Turn the engine
off and wait until it cools down.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information” section.)
.
It is advisable to secure or remove
any loose clothing and remove any
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
before working on your vehicle.
Avoid direct contact with used en-
gine oil and coolant. Improperly
disposed engine oil, and engine
coolant and/or other vehicle fluids
can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations
for disposal of vehicle fluid.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and could
affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about
any servicing, we recommend that it be
.
.
Always wear eye protection when-
ever you work on your vehicle.
If you must run the engine in an
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
done by a NISSAN dealer.
SDI2172
6. Fuse/fusible link holder
7. Window washer fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Radiator filler cap
VQ35DE ENGINE
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Drive belt location
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Air cleaner
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Battery
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-
ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains
rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional
cooling system additives are not necessary.
50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized
or distilled water. The use of other
types of coolant solutions may damage
the engine cooling system.
Outside
temperature
down to
Deminera-
lized water
or distilled
water
WARNING
Anti-freeze
50%
.
Never remove the radiator or cool-
ant reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHI-
CLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case
of emergency” section of this man-
ual.
8F
−30
8C
−35
50%
SDI2173
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
.
The radiator is equipped with a
pressure type radiator cap. To pre-
vent engine damage, use only a
genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
2
the MIN level
, open the reservoir cap and
*
1
add coolant up to the MAX level
. If the
*
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
1
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level
.
*
CAUTION
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equiva-
lent with the proper mixture ratio of
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
and pour recommended oil through the
3
*
opening. Do not overfill
.
Major cooling system repairs should be per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service
procedures can be found in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the break-
in period, depending on the severity of
operating conditions.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
CAUTION
WARNING
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not cov-
ered by the warranty.
.
.
To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never change the coolant
when the engine is hot.
SDI2174
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Change the engine oil and filter according to the
maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
temperature.
.
.
Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
Keep coolant out of reach of chil-
dren and pets.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes.
1
level. It should be within the range
. If the
*
2
oil level is below
, remove the oil filler cap
*
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
.
Place the safety jack stands under the
vehicle jack-up points.
.
A suitable adapter should be attached to
the jack stand saddle.
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
port points are used to avoid vehicle
damage.
SDI2175
SDI2355
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
A
*
.
B
*
2. Remove the oil filler cap
.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and
completely drain the oil.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight
resistance is felt, then tighten additionally
more than 2/3 turn.
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the
engine oil is hot.
After the operation
1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.5 N·m)
9. Install the plastic cover.
2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
.
Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
10. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench.
WARNING
.
Check your local regulations.
.
.
Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
Perform steps 4 to 9 when the engine oil
filter change is needed.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 N·m)
4. Remove the plastic cover over the oil filter
location by removing the small plastic clips
as illustrated.
Do not use excessive force.
Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
11. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler
cap securely.
C
5. Loosen the oil filter
with an oil filter
*
wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by
hand.
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section for drain
and refill capacity. The drain and refill
capacity depends on the oil temperature
and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only. Always use the dipstick to
determine the proper amount of oil in the
engine.
.
Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface
with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket
material remaining on the mounting
surface of the engine. Failure to do so
could lead to engine damage.
12. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
13. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
CAUTION
CAUTION
.
.
Do not overfill.
.
.
Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or
equivalent.
Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2
will damage the CVT, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
SDI2177
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
1
3
range (
: HOT MAX.,
: HOT MIN.) at fluid
*
*
temperatures of 122 to 1768F (50 to 808C) or
using the COLD range (
COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 868F
2
*
3
: COLD MAX.,
:
*
(0 to 308C).
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine
NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap
and fill through the opening.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE FLUID
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
For additional brake fluid information, see
“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/
LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
.
Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake
system. The use of improper fluids
can damage the brake system and
affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
.
.
Clean the filler cap before removing.
SDI2178
SDI2179
Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked con-
tainers out of the reach of children.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is
or the brake warning
light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add window washer fluid when the low
window washer fluid warning light illuminates.
2
*
below the MIN line
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap and pour the window washer fluid into the
reservoir opening.
1
*
fluid up to the MAX line
. If fluid must be
CAUTION
added frequently, the system should be checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
Do not spill the fluid on any painted
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If
fluid is spilled, immediately wash the
surface with water.
Add a washer solvent to the water for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
window washer fluid.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY
.
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
Recommended fluid:
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen-
trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
.
.
When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
.
.
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (−) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
.
.
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
WARNING
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
.
Do not expose the battery to flames
or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas
generated by the battery is explo-
sive. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or
painted surfaces. After touching a
battery or battery cap, do not touch
or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical attention.
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
.
Do not operate the vehicle if the
fluid in the battery is low. Low
battery fluid can cause a higher load
on the battery which can generate
heat, reduce battery life, and in
some cases lead to an explosion.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP
STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
DI0137MA
SDI1480C
A
Check the fluid level in each cell. (Remove the
battery cover if it is necessary.) It should be
1. Remove the cell plugs
.
*
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL
1
*
between the UPPER LEVEL
and LOWER
1
*
line.
2
LEVEL
lines.
*
If the side of the battery is not clear, check
the distilled water level by looking directly
above the cell; the condition
2
OK and the conditions
*
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level to the indicator in each
filler opening. Do not overfill.
1
indicates
*
needs more to
be added.
A
*
3. Tighten cell plugs
.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
DRIVE BELT
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
2. Have the belt condition checked regularly.
.
.
Do not ground accessories directly
to the battery terminal. Doing so will
bypass the variable voltage control
system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely.
Use electrical accessories with the
engine running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
The variable voltage control system measures
the amount of electrical discharge from the
battery and controls voltage generated by the
generator.
SDI2186
1. Power steering oil pump
2. Alternator
3. Drive belt auto-tensioner
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Air conditioner compressor
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belt. The engine could rotate unexpect-
edly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or loose, have it replaced
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPARK PLUGS
AIR CLEANER
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
SDI2020
SDI2180
1
Pull the tabs
*
2
*
and pull out the cover
.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Main-
tenance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe
the inside of the air cleaner housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer
for servicing.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the platinum-
tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conven-
tional type spark plugs since they will last much
longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do
not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
WARNING
.
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it
Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
isn’t there, and the engine backfires,
you could be burned. Do not drive
with the air cleaner removed, and be
careful when working on the engine
with the air cleaner removed.
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle
body or attempt to start the engine
with the air cleaner removed. Doing
so could result in serious injury.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.
Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your
windshield is still not clear after cleaning the
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDI2048
REPLACING
CAUTION
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
.
.
After wiper blade replacement, re-
turn the wiper arm to its original
position; otherwise it may be da-
maged when the hood is opened.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A
2. Push and hold the release tab
, and
*
move the wiper blade down the wiper arm
1
*
.
SDI2199
Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arm may be
damaged from wind pressure.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
A
*
Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle
.
arm until a click sounds.
This may cause improper windshield washer
operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any
4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is
in the groove.
B
objects with a needle or small pin
careful not to damage the nozzle.
. Be
*
Contact a NISSAN dealer for wiper blade rubber
replacement.
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
BRAKES
Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or
replacement is required.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
affect the function or performance of the brake
system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information, see the
maintenance log section of your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake
system check if the brake pedal height
does not return to normal.
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear warning
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
light to moderate stops is normal and does not
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUSES
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by
1
*
pushing the tab
.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller located
in the passenger compartment fuse box.
SDI1754
SDI2181
A
5. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
*
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
B
fuse
. Spare fuses are stored in the
passenger compartment fuse box.
*
CAUTION
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.
2. Open the engine hood.
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to
swallow the battery and removed parts.
SDI2196
2
*
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.
CAUTION
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.
1
*
2. Pull to remove the fuse box cover
.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR2032 or equivalent
.
.
.
Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom case.
SDI1889
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts,
and then push them together until it is
securely closed.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance
for replacement.
SDI2135
FCC Notice:
Replace the battery as follows:
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential in-
stallation. This equipment generates, uses
1. Remove the mechanical key from the key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect
the casing.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communica-
tions. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the inter-
ference by one or more of the following
measures:
—
—
—
Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
tenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
—
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTS
1. Front turn signal/park light
2. Headlight (high-beam) or Front park light
3. Headlight (low-beam, high-beam) or (low-beam)
4. Side marker light
5. Front map light
6. Rear personal light
7. Front fog light (if so equipped)
8. Step light
9. High-mounted stop light
10. Back-up light
11. Rear combination light (stop/tail/turn signal/side
marker light)
12. License plate light
13. Cargo light
SDI2182
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLIGHTS
Halogen headlight model:
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is
not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not leave the bulb out of the
headlight reflector for a long period
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance.
Replacing
Xenon headlight model:
WARNING
High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb
may break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xe-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer. For additional information, see
“HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
.
.
Only touch the plastic base when
handling the bulb. Never touch the
glass envelope.
Aiming is not necessary after repla-
cing the bulb. When aiming adjust-
ment is necessary, contact
NISSAN dealer.
a
Use the same number and wattage as originally
installed as shown in the chart.
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disconnect the battery negative cable before
replacing bulbs.
To replace the headlight bulb, if necessary,
remove the rubber cover by pulling out the two
1
*
clips
.
A
High-beam bulb
Low-beam bulb
*
B
*
SDI2183
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
**: Xenon headlight model
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a
NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.
Headlight
High/Low beams (Xenon)*
High beam (Halogen)
Low beam (Halogen)
Front turn signal/park light*
Front turn signal light**
Front park light**
Front fog light (if so equipped)
Front side marker
Rear combination light*
turn signal
35
65
55
27/8
21
5
D2S
HB3
H11
1157NA
WY21W
WY5W
H8
35
5
WY5W
21
LED
5
W21W
—
stop/tail
side marker
W5W
W16W
T10
—
back-up
16
5
License plate light*
Front map light
8
Rear personal light
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)
Step light*
8
—
2
—
8
—
High-mounted stop light*
Cargo light
LED
8
—
—
Glove box light*
3.4
LED
—
Mood light*
—
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
SDI2200
Side marker light (Halogen headlight model)
1. Remove the rubber cover. (See “HEAD-
LIGHTS” earlier in this section.)
2. Remove the bulb as illustrated.
SDI1679
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDI2030
SDI1500B
Front map light
Cargo light
SDI2184
Front fog light (if so equipped)
SDI2031
SDI2032
Rear personal light
Vanity mirror light
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section.
and Loading Information label is affixed to
the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
should be checked regularly because:
not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capa-
city may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
TIRE PRESSURE
.
.
Most tires naturally lose air over time.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tires can lose air suddenly when driven
over potholes or other objects or if the
vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
.
.
Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect tire
life and vehicle handling.
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
WARNING
.
.
Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
Tire inflation pressure
The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.
S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
bel. The vehicle weight capacity
is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
Check the pressure of the tires (including
the spare) often and always prior to long
distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label under
the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
* Original size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
4
* Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
5
* Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”
later in this section.
6
* Spare tire size or compact spare tire
size (if so equipped)
SDI2197
Tire and Loading Information label
2
* Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE
LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information”
section.
1
* Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
COLD TIRE
INFLATION
PRESSURE
SIZE
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of the
valve stem briefly with the tip of the
gauge stem to release pressure. Re-
check the pressure and add or release
air as needed.
P235/65R18 230 kPa,
FRONT
ORIGINAL
TIRE
104T
P235/55R20 230 kPa,
102T 33 PSI
P235/65R18 230 kPa,
33 PSI
REAR
ORIGINAL
TIRE
6. Install the valve stem cap.
104T
33 PSI
P235/55R20 230 kPa,
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
102T
33 PSI
SDI1949
230 kPa,
33 PSI
Original tire
SPARE
TIRE
Checking the tire pressure
T165/90D18 420 kPa,
107M
60 PSI
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto
the valve stem. Do not press too hard or
force the valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard while
checking the pressure, reposition the
gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specifica-
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Two-digit number (16): This number is
the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight each
tire can support. You may not find this
information on all tires because it is not
required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
SDI1575
SDI1606
Example
Example
TIRE LABELING
1
* Tire size (example: P215/60R16
94H)
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the side-
wall of all tires. This information identifies
and describes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides the tire
identification number (TIN) for safety stan-
dard certification. The TIN can be used to
identify the tire in case of a recall.
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed
for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires
have this information.)
2. Three-digit number (215): This number
gives the width in millimeters of the tire
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (60): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
6. Four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 3103 means the 31st week of
2003. If these numbers are missing,
then look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
6
* Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an
inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
7
* The word “radial”
3
* Tire ply composition and material
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire
has radial structure.
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
8
* Manufacturer or brand name
SDI1607
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Example
2
* TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
4
* Maximum permissible inflation pres-
Other tire-related terminology:
sure
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model
name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of
the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department
of Transportation”. The symbol can be
placed above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification Number.
5
* Maximum load rating
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-
tional)
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TYPES OF TIRES
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the
tire.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction
than All Season tires and may be more appro-
priate in some areas.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
WARNING
.
When changing or replacing tires,
be sure all four tires are of the same
type (Example: Summer, All Season
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-
abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry
surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-
studded snow tires.
or Snow) and construction.
A
NISSAN dealer may be able to help
you with information about tire type,
size, speed rating and availability.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry
roads. Summer tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
sidewall.
.
Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
CAUTION
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
.
Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
belted or radial), and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Failure to do so
may result in a circumference differ-
ence between tires on the front and
rear axles which will cause exces-
sive tire wear and may damage the
transmission, transfer case and dif-
ferential gears.
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
Snow tires
For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully
loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In
addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle
handling and performance may be adversely
affected.
.
ONLY use spare tires specified for
the AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-
mended that all four tires be replaced with tires
of the same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment
should also be checked and corrected as
necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according
to location. Check the local laws before instal-
ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make
sure they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are
designed to meet the SAE standard minimum
clearances between the tire and the closest
vehicle suspension or body component required
to accommodate the use of a winter traction
device (tire chains or cables). The minimum
clearances are determined using the factory
equipped tire size. Other types may damage
your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-
commended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire
chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
SDI1662
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See “FLAT
TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for tire replacing procedures.)
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
.
Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician, because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-
tened to the specification at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to the specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
.
.
Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious perso-
nal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
.
.
After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
SDI1663
Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
1. Wear indicator
2. Wear indicator location mark
Tire wear and damage
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
.
.
Do not include the spare tire or
any other small size spare tire in
the tire rotation.
WARNING
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
.
Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bul-
ging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICA-
TIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section for recommended types
and sizes of tires and wheels.)
.
The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
WARNING
CAUTION
.
The use of tires other than those
recommended or the mixed use of
tires of different brands, construc-
tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or
tread patterns can adversely affect
the ride, braking, handling, ground
clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
tire chain clearance, speedometer
calibration, headlight aim and bum-
per height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may
damage the transmission, transfer case
and differential gears (AWD models).
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can
get out of balance. Therefore, they should be
balanced as required.
Do not install a damaged or de-
formed wheel or tire even if it has
been repaired. Such wheels or tires
could have structural damage and
could fail without warning.
.
If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear,
degrade vehicle handling character-
istics and/or interference with the
brake discs/drums. Such interfer-
ence can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake pad/
shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of
this manual for wheel off-set dimen-
sions.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
.
.
The use of retread tire is not re-
commended.
For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-
ranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
.
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
.
.
Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-
ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-
stalled. Avoid sharp turns and
abrupt braking while driving.
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
.
.
.
Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
.
.
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
Periodically check spare tire infla-
tion pressure. Always keep the
pressure of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,
4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure
of the full size spare tire (if so
equipped) at the recommended
pressure for standard tires, as in-
dicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
Do not use more than one spare tire
at the same time.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
Do not tow a trailer while the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
is installed.
.
NISSAN recommends that the road wheels
be waxed to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
CAUTION
Spare tire
.
.
Do not use tire chains on a TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire
chains will not fit properly and may
cause damage to the vehicle.
When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY
USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS will not
function.
.
.
With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire installed do not drive your
vehicle at speeds faster than 50
MPH (80 km/h).
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,
otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident.
Because the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire is smaller than the
original tire, ground clearance is
reduced. To avoid damage to the
vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.
Also do not drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
since it may get caught.
When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on
the rear wheels and original tire
used on the front wheels (drive
wheels). Use tire chains only on
the front (original) tires.
WARNING
.
The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire should be used for emergency
use. It should be replaced with the
standard tire at the first opportunity
to avoid possible tire or differential
damage.
.
Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............ 9-2
Fuel recommendation ...................................... 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............... 9-5
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant
Engine......................................................... 9-7
Wheels and tires............................................ 9-7
Dimensions and weights .................................. 9-8
Vehicle load capacity .................................... 9-12
Securing the load......................................... 9-14
Loading tips................................................ 9-15
Measurement of weights ................................ 9-15
Maximum load limits...................................... 9-16
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/
maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) ................ 9-17
Towing load/specification ............................... 9-19
Towing safety .............................................. 9-20
Flat towing ................................................. 9-23
Uniform tire quality grading................................. 9-24
Treadwear .................................................. 9-24
Traction AA, A, B and C ................................ 9-24
Temperature A, B and C................................ 9-24
Emission control system warranty......................... 9-25
Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... 9-25
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test...... 9-26
Event Data Recorders (EDR) .............................. 9-27
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ... 9-27
In the event of a collision ............................... 9-28
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country.................................................. 9-8
Vehicle identification ........................................... 9-8
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ............. 9-8
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)...... 9-9
Engine serial number ...................................... 9-9
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............... 9-9
Emission control information label .................... 9-10
Tire and loading information label..................... 9-10
Air conditioner specification label..................... 9-10
Installing front license plate ................................ 9-11
Vehicle loading information ................................. 9-12
Terms........................................................ 9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended specifications
US measure
21-5/8 gal
Imp measure
18 gal
Liter
82
Fuel
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1
Engine oil*2
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
4-7/8 qt
4-1/2 qt
4 qt
4.6
4.3
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark*3
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
Without oil filter change
Cooling system
3-3/4 qt
With reservoir
10 qt
8-1/4 qt
9.4
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
Reservoir
7/8 qt
—
3/4 qt
—
0.8
—
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
Differential gear oil
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*4
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE
80W-90*5
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE
80W-90
Transfer oil
—
—
—
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake fluid
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*8
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*6 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricants
Window washer fluid
HFC-134a (R-134a)*7
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or exact equivalent
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
*1: For additional information, see “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.
*2: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*3: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.
*4: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
*5: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F (08C).
*6: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
*7: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.
*8: DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
.
.
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-
fications where it is available. Many of the
automobile manufacturers developed this spe-
cification to improve emission control system
and vehicle performance. Ask your service
station manager if the gasoline meets the
WWFC specifications.
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-
search octane number 98).
If an oxygenate-blend, other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 87 AKI number
(Research octane number 91), but you may
notice a decrease in performance.
.
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not
available to ensure that all methanol
blends are suitable for use in NISSAN
vehicles.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-
mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control system, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way cat-
alyst.
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-
nol with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels
of which the oxygenate content and the fuel
compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily
determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced
after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
Take care not to spill gasoline during
refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the condition. Failure to correct the condi-
tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which
NISSAN is not responsible.
E-85 fuel
.
U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate per-
centage for that region.
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-
ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are
encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel
injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-
cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,
varnish or deposit removal may contain active
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful
to the fuel system and engine.
CAUTION
.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a
vehicle not specifically designed for
E-85 fuel can damage fuel system
components and is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark
knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If
severe, this can lead to engine damage. If
you detect a persistent heavy spark knock
even when using gasoline of the stated
octane rating, or if you hear steady spark
knock while holding a steady speed on
level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct
.
E-85 is a mixture of approximately
85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals”.
STI0505
1. API certification mark
2. API service symbol
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API
certification mark on the front of the container.
Oils which do not have the specified quality
label should not be used as they could cause
engine damage.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and
filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-
ing recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of
incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-
COMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance, see
“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/
LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN
recommends the use of an energy conserving oil
in order to improve fuel economy.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used and
maintenance intervals are followed.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has
been previously used should not be used.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
upon how you use your vehicle.
system components.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect
the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental
regulations require the recovery and recycling of
any refrigerant during automotive air condition-
ing system service. A NISSAN dealer has the
trained technicians and equipment needed to
recover and recycle your air conditioning system
refrigerant.
.
repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
.
.
.
.
driving in dusty conditions
extensive idling
towing a trailer
stop and go commuting
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your
air conditioning system.
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-
FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-
COMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exact
equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
WHEELS AND TIRES
Road wheel
ENGINE
Model
VQ35DE
Type
Size
Offset in (mm)
1.97 (50)
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle
6-cylinder, V-slanted at 608
3.760 6 3.205 (95.5 6 81.4)
213.45 (3,498)
Cylinder arrangement
Bore 6 Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
18 6 7-1/2J
20 6 7-1/2J
Aluminum
in (mm)
cu in (cm3)
1.97 (50)
Tire
1-2-3-4-5-6
Idle speed
rpm
Pressure PSI
(kPa) [Cold]
No adjustment is necessary.
Type
Size
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)
Spark plug
degree/rpm
Standard
in (mm)
FXE22HR-11
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
P235/65R18
104T
Spark plug gap (Normal)
Conventional
T-type
33 (230)
60 (420)
P235/55R20
102T
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
T165/90D18
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN
ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to travel in another coun-
try, you should first find out if the fuel available is
suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
Overall width
in (mm) 188.5 (4,788)
in (mm) 74.1 (1,883)
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline.
Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas
where appropriate fuel is not available.
Overall height with-
out roof rack rail
in (mm) 67.0 (1,703)
Overall height with
roof rack rail
in (mm) 68.1 (1,729)
Front tread
in (mm) 63.4 (1,610)
in (mm) 63.4 (1,610)
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
Rear tread
Wheelbase
in (mm)
111.2 (2,825)
Gross vehicle weight
rating
lb (kg)
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may
differ.
See the F.M.V.S.S.
certification label
on the driver’s side
STI0334
Gross axle weight
rating
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
Front
Rear
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
lock pillar.
The vehicle identification number plate is at-
tached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
When any vehicle is to be taken into
another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsi-
bility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STI0374
STI0562
STI0448
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification
label is affixed as shown. This label contains
valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
Remove the cover to access the number.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STI0563
STI0373
STI0339
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
LABEL
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as
illustrated.
The air conditioner specification label is at-
tached as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Use the following steps to mount the license
plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic
bag.
.
.
.
.
License plate bracket
Bolt 6 2
Screw 6 2
Screw grommet 6 2
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.
B
2. Line up the tabs
on the license plate
*
bracket under the top of the front bumper
A
*
. Hold the license plate bracket in place.
C
*
3. Mark the center of the hole
with a felt-
tip pen.
4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in
(10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be
sure that the drill only goes through the
bumper fascia.)
5. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.
6. Install the license plate bracket with bolts.
7. Install the license plate with screws.
STI0564
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
.
.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- maximum total combined weight of the
unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other
optional equipment. This information is
located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
label.
.
Cargo capacity - permissible weight of
cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-
pants from the load limit.
WARNING
.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside the vehi-
cle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle
shown as “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading
Information label. Do not exceed the
number of occupants shown as “Seating
Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. label.
.
.
Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
To get “the combined weight of occupants
and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-
pants, then add the total luggage weight.
Examples are shown in the following
illustration.
.
.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-
ing) - The maximum total weight rating
of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and
trailer.
TERMS
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
This is the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is
used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue
weight must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is located
on the Tire and Loading Information
label.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
.
Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment,
fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or
(640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
STI0445
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
lb. (98 N) to a single hook
or 7 lb. (31 N)
*
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
B
to a single hook
when securing cargo.
*
WARNING
.
.
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS”
later in this section.)
The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Information
label.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum
front and rear GAWRs. If you do,
parts of your vehicle can break, tire
damage could occur, or it can
change the way your vehicle han-
dles. This could result in loss of
control and cause personal injury.
SIC3596
SECURING THE LOAD
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of
straps.
Do not apply a total load of more than 22
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING A TRAILER
LOADING TIPS
the tire, but can cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer
braking distances. This may
cause a premature tire failure,
which could result in a serious
accident and personal injury.
Failures caused by overloading
are not covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.
WARNING
.
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
.
Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 miles (800 km).
Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
.
.
Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts
that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed
either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given
on the vehicle certification label. If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove
items to bring all weights below the ratings.
For the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over
50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not make
starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of your
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-
member that towing a trailer places additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steer-
ing, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing
capability and the special equipment required
.
Overloading not only can short-
en the life of your vehicle and
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for proper towing.
outside temperatures on graded roads can
affect engine performance and cause overheat-
ing. The transmission high fluid temperature
protection mode, which helps reduce the
chance of transmission damage, could activate
and automatically decrease engine power.
Vehicle speed may decrease under high load.
Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value specified in the “Towing Load/Specifica-
tion” chart. The total trailer load equals trailer
weight plus its cargo weight.
.
When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced en-
gine power and vehicle speed. The
reduced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance
of a collision. Be especially careful
when driving. If the vehicle cannot
maintain a safe driving speed, pull to
the side of the road in a safe area.
Allow the engine to cool and return to
normal operation. See “IF YOUR VEHI-
CLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) should not exceed the value specified in
the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart.
STI0541
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater
than these or using improper towing equipment
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but
also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights
appropriate for level highway driving may have to
be reduced on very steep grades or for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery boat
ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from impro-
per towing procedures are not covered
by NISSAN warranties.
STI0542
TI1012M
Tongue load
MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
(GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE
WEIGHT (GAW)
When using a weight carrying or a weight
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between
10 to 15% of the total trailer load within the
maximum tongue load limits shown in the
following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If
the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange
cargo to allow for proper tongue load.
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
required to achieve the rating. Additional pas-
sengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such
as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle
and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing
capacity and trailer tongue load.
later in this section.
Example:
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum towing capacity.
.
.
.
.
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo
and hitch - 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg).
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating
shown on the trailer and is not more than the
calculated available maximum towing capacity.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
5,263 lb. (2,387 kg).
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification” chart -
8,300 lb. (3,765 kg).
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-
ing Load/Specification” chart - 3,500 lb.
(1,588 kg).
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale
to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and
Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified
ratings.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
5,263 lb. (2,387 kg)
GVWR
GVW
− 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg)
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. certification label.
Available for tongue
weight
= 337 lb. (152 kg)
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
8,300 lb. (3,765 kg)
GCWR
GVW
− 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg)
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
Capacity available for
towing
= 3,374 lb. (1,530 kg)
To determine the available towing capacity, use
the following procedure.
337 lb. (152 kg) /
Available tongue weight
Available capacity
3,374 lb. (1,530 kg)
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
“Towing Load/Specification” chart found
= 10 % tongue weight
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the
passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
Unit: lb (kg)
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
tween 10 to 15% of the trailer weight. If the
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the
cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not
exceed the 10 to 15% tongue weight specifica-
tion even if the calculated available tongue
weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated
tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total
trailer weight to match the available tongue
weight.
VQ35DE
CVT
MODEL
WEIGHT
MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT*1
MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD
3,500 (1,588)
350 (159)
GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING
RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT*2
8,300 (3,765)
Sway Control Device (SCD)
1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem
axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lb (1,361 kg).
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
2: A sway control device is recommended for all towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Sway control devices are not
offered by NISSAN. See a professional trailer/hitch outlet for a properly designed sway control device for your
trailer.
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the
trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to
help avoid personal injury or property damage
due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road
surfaces or passing trucks.
.
.
The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16@ smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
CAUTION
.
.
Special hitches which include frame
reinforcements are required for tow-
ing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable
genuine NISSAN hitches for pickup
trucks and sport utility vehicles are
available at a NISSAN dealer.
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
The hitch should not be attached to
or affect the operation of the im-
pact-absorbing bumper.
WARNING
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer
handling. Sway control devices may be used to
help control these affects. If you choose to use
one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to
make sure the sway control device will work with
the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake
system. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
.
.
Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be
capable of towing a trailer heavier than
the weight rating of the hitch compo-
nents. Never exceed the weight rating
of the hitch components. Doing so can
cause serious personal injury or prop-
erty damage.
Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, etc. to install
a trailer hitch.
.
To reduce the possibility of addi-
tional damage if your vehicle is
struck from the rear, where practi-
cal, remove the hitch and/or recei-
ver when not in use. After the hitch
is removed, seal the bolt holes to
prevent exhaust fumes, water or
dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
Hitch ball
Class I hitch
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
.
.
The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on top of the ball.
.
Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely
mounted.
Class II hitch
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,588 kg).
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition;
check for improper tongue load, overload,
worn suspension or other possible causes
of either condition.
Tire pressures
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail
light, stoplight and turn signal circuits
as a signal source. The module/con-
verter must draw no more than 15
milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
circuits. Using a module/converter that
exceeds these power requirements may
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain
the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
.
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle
tires to the recommended cold tire
pressure indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
.
.
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should be
in accordance with the trailer and tire
manufacturers’ specifications.
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
.
.
.
.
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
Safety chains
Always use a suitable chain between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety
chains can be attached to the bumper if the
hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to
leave enough slack in the chains to permit
turning corners.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or
reputable trailer dealer.
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,
and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you
attach a trailer to the vehicle.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
Trailer lights
WARNING
CAUTION
Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
Never connect a trailer brake system
directly to the vehicle brake system.
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system,
a
commercially available
power-type module/converter must be
used to provide power for all trailer
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle
battery as a direct power source for all
Pre-towing tips
Trailer towing tips
.
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from traffic. Steering stability, and braking
performance will be somewhat different than
under normal driving conditions.
When going up a long grade, downshift the
transmission to a lower gear and reduce
speed to reduce chances of engine over-
loading and/or overheating.
the wheels and applying the parking
brake, transmission damage could oc-
cur.
.
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
.
If the engine coolant rises to an extremely
high temperature when the air conditioning
system is on, turn off the air conditioner.
Coolant heat can be additionally vented by
opening the windows, switching the fan
control to high and setting the temperature
control to the HOT position.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
.
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-
tently becoming unlatched.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks
absorb the vehicle load.
.
.
.
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
.
.
.
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed. Some states or provinces have
specific speed limits for vehicles that are
towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km).
To drive away:
Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide.
.
When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
.
.
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect
CAUTION
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
If you move the shift selector lever to
the P (Park) position before blocking
.
When going down a hill, shift into a lower
gear and use the engine braking effect.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle handling. If swaying does occur,
firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight
ahead, and immediately (but gradually)
reduce vehicle speed. This combination will
help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase
speed.
without applying the brakes.
When towing a trailer, the transmission
fluid should be changed more frequently.
For additional information, see the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.
.
.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
FLAT TOWING
Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a
vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a
motor home.
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the
vehicle.
.
.
Do not use cruise control while towing a
trailer.
Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles
that are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits.
CAUTION
— Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
.
.
.
Failure to follow these guidelines
can result in severe transmission
damage.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply
the brakes and pull to the side of the road in
a safe area.
.
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after
50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every
break.
Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
always tow forward, never back-
ward.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced as described earlier in this section.
.
.
.
When stopped in traffic for long periods of
time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P
(Park) position.
.
Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than normal
passing. Remember the length of the trailer
must also pass the other vehicle before you
can safely change lanes.
DO NOT tow any continuously vari-
able transmission vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground (flat
towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE
internal transmission parts due to
lack of transmission lubrication.
When launching a boat, don’t allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
.
Down shift the transmission to a lower gear
for engine braking when driving down steep
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
.
DO NOT tow an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle with any of the
wheels on the ground. Doing so
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.
WARNING
.
For emergency towing procedures
refer to “TOWING RECOMMENDED
BY NISSAN” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
TREADWEAR
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate.
Do not tow an AWD vehicle with any of the
wheels on the ground.
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:
To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed
vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly
manufacturer’s recommendations when using
their product.
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
Your NISSAN is covered by the following
emission warranties.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying NISSAN.
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
For USA:
.
.
Emission Defects Warranty
Emissions Performance Warranty
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
.
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-
ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.
gov.
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261).
.
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
should never be tested using a two wheel
dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used
by some states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment. Make sure you inform test facility
personnel that your vehicle is equipped with
AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may result in
transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle
damage or personal injury.
“ready”.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready”
condition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the “ready condi-
tion”. If you cannot or do not want to perform the
driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it
for you.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for at least 3
minutes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission
selector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position.
9. Turn the engine off.
WARNING
10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more
time.
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic
conditions and obey all traffic laws.
Due to legal requirements in some states/areas
or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be
in what is called the “ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-
sion control system.
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
acceptable between steps. Do not stop the
engine until step 7 is completed.
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle
until the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle points between the C and H (normal
operating temperature).
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when
it is driven through certain driving patterns.
Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained
by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking
the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/
maintenance test readiness condition. Turn the
ignition switch to the ON position without
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment
procedures, this manual is the same one used
by the factory trained technicians working at a
NISSAN dealer. Also available are genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genuine
NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older
NISSAN models.
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will
only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
In the USA:
.
.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later, contact:
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
.
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Sounds are not recorded.
1-800-247-5321
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,
gender, age and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please
contact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call
the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-
0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will
assist you.
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit
unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at
the end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones
to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate
the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.
Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide
such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine
parts often show premature wear, rust and
corrosion.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this
unlikely event, there is some important informa-
tion you should know.
Why should you take a chance?
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted
laws that restrict insurance companies from
authorizing the use of non-genuine collision
parts during the new vehicle warranty. These
laws help protect you, so you can take action to
protect yourself.
Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN
Collision Parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using
parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting
specifications — if you want to help it to last
and hold its resale value, the solution is simple.
Tell your insurance agent and your repair
shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli-
sion Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-
NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty
apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty
protection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
9-28 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Index
Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray) . . . . . . 2-40
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Auto closure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Autochanger, Compact Disc (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Autolight system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Automatic
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Seat positioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Brightness control
Display ON/OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Air bag system
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . 1-52
Front-seat mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
C
Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . 9-2
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cargo floor box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cargo lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
CD/CF care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Center multi-function control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Chimes, Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Cigarette lighter and ashtray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Circuit breaker, Fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
rollover supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . 1-55
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58, 2-14
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Air conditioner
B
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, 9-6
Back door (See lift gate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Alarm, How to stop alarm
(see vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Alcohol, drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
All-wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . 2-11
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Interior appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
(without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Dot matrix liquid crystal display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Driving
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine start operation indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Entry/exit function, Automatic drive positioner... 3-30
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Command (See Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76, 4-90
Command (See INFINITI voice recognition
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11, 4-104
Compact Disc (CD) changer
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Compact Disc (CD) player/changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
CompactFlash (CF) player
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Coolant
All-wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Driving with CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . . 5-13
On-pavement and off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
DVD player, NISSAN mobile entertainment. . . . . . 4-63
F
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Filter
E
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ... 2-36
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Floor mat cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Fluid
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Economy, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Elapsed time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Engine
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Cover, Cargo cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Capacities and recommended fuel/
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
CVT, Driving with CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine oil replacement indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
D
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Display cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Display controls
(See center multi-function control panel) . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Door/lift gate open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)
changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . . . . . 1-52
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Front seat, Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front-seat active head restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Fuel
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-7
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Intelligent Key warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Interior light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
iPod® player operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
ISOFIX child restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
H
Hands-free phone system
Bluetooth® (with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Bluetooth® (without navigation system) . . . . . . 4-85
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Headlights
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Fuel economy information (display). . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Fuel octane rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Fuel-filler door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Headphones (See INFINITI mobile
entertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66, 4-73
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Heater
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Heater and air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . 4-26
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Hook
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
K
G
Keyless entry
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Luggage hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-7
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
I
L
Ignition switch (Push-button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Indicator
Dot matrix display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Labels
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . 9-9
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-31, 9-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License plate, Installing front license plate. . . . . . . 9-11
Lift gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Light
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Luggage side box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
N
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
NISSAN Mobile entertainment system (MES) . . . 4-63
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
NISSAN voice recognition system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
No key warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
M
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Cargo lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Headlights bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Mood lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Maintenance
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Indicators for maintenance (dot matrix) . . . . . . 2-20
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance information (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner. . . . . 3-31
Meter, Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Mirror
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Monitor, Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Mood lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Multi-function controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Music box hard-disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
O
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil filter replacement indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement . . . 8-27
Loading information
(See vehicle loading information). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Lock
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Lift gate lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Low fuel warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Low outside temperature warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Operation, Indicators for operation
(dot matrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Outside air temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Overdrive OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
P
Panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Parking
Brake break-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Parking brake release warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Low washer fluid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Phone
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)
changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44, 4-39
Rain-sensing auto wiper system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Seat belt hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Seat belts with pretensioners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Three-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . 3-7
Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Recorders, Event data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Registering your vehicle in another country. . . . . . . . 9-8
Remote controller (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Roof, Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Precautions
Audio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Braking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Driving safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
On-pavement and off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
When starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9, 5-10
“PUSH” warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Seat(s)
Driver-side memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Security system, Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . 2-25
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), Engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
S
Selector lever
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
SHIFT “P” warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Shift lock release, Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Safety
Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Seat belt(s)
Shifting, CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Small light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39, 9-7
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
R
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch ... 2-39
Towing
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Status light, Front passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Steering
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
T
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Transceiver, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Transmission
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Steering lock release malfunction
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
“Time to rest” indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Tire
Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light ... 2-12
Tire replacement indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Tires
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Driving with CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . . 5-13
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for
audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Transmission selector lever lock release . . . . . 5-16
Transmitter
Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Storage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . 1-58, 2-14
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Traveling or registering your vehicle in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Low tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-31, 9-10
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Tire dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2
U
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Switch
Underbody cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Tonneau cover (see cargo cover). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Top tether strap child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Touch screen system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Overdrive OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Vehicle
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Loading information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . .. 2-39
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . . . . 5-27
Vehicle information and settings (display). . . . . . 4-8
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . 2-30
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . 2-28
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Window(s)
Voice command (See Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76, 4-90
Voice command (See INFINITI voice
recognition system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11, 4-104, 4-112
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Wiper
W
Warning
Rain-sensing auto wiper system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . 2-30
Rear window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . 2-28
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Dot matrix display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
X
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Warning light
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58, 2-14
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
AWD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Intelligent Key warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Warranty, Emission control system warranty. . . . . 9-25
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS”
in the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section.
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-
search octane number 98).
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 87 AKI number
(Research octane number 91), but you may
notice a decrease in performance.
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section for engine oil and
oil filter recommendation.
CAUTION
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control systems, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, see “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
.
.
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, since this
will damage the three way catalyst.
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-
DURES RECOMMENDATION:
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-
lined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s
Manual. Follow these recommendations for the
future reliability and economy of your new
vehicle.
For additional information, see “CAPACITIES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
